Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in bfd
elf32-hppa.c revision 1.4
      1  1.1     skrll /* BFD back-end for HP PA-RISC ELF files.
      2  1.1     skrll    Copyright 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1999, 2000, 2001,
      3  1.3  christos    2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010
      4  1.1     skrll    Free Software Foundation, Inc.
      5  1.1     skrll 
      6  1.1     skrll    Original code by
      7  1.1     skrll 	Center for Software Science
      8  1.1     skrll 	Department of Computer Science
      9  1.1     skrll 	University of Utah
     10  1.1     skrll    Largely rewritten by Alan Modra <alan (at) linuxcare.com.au>
     11  1.1     skrll    Naming cleanup by Carlos O'Donell <carlos (at) systemhalted.org>
     12  1.1     skrll    TLS support written by Randolph Chung <tausq (at) debian.org>
     13  1.1     skrll 
     14  1.1     skrll    This file is part of BFD, the Binary File Descriptor library.
     15  1.1     skrll 
     16  1.1     skrll    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
     17  1.1     skrll    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
     18  1.1     skrll    the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
     19  1.1     skrll    (at your option) any later version.
     20  1.1     skrll 
     21  1.1     skrll    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
     22  1.1     skrll    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     23  1.1     skrll    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
     24  1.1     skrll    GNU General Public License for more details.
     25  1.1     skrll 
     26  1.1     skrll    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     27  1.1     skrll    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
     28  1.1     skrll    Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
     29  1.1     skrll    MA 02110-1301, USA.  */
     30  1.1     skrll 
     31  1.1     skrll #include "sysdep.h"
     32  1.1     skrll #include "bfd.h"
     33  1.1     skrll #include "libbfd.h"
     34  1.1     skrll #include "elf-bfd.h"
     35  1.1     skrll #include "elf/hppa.h"
     36  1.1     skrll #include "libhppa.h"
     37  1.1     skrll #include "elf32-hppa.h"
     38  1.1     skrll #define ARCH_SIZE		32
     39  1.1     skrll #include "elf32-hppa.h"
     40  1.1     skrll #include "elf-hppa.h"
     41  1.1     skrll 
     42  1.1     skrll /* In order to gain some understanding of code in this file without
     43  1.1     skrll    knowing all the intricate details of the linker, note the
     44  1.1     skrll    following:
     45  1.1     skrll 
     46  1.1     skrll    Functions named elf32_hppa_* are called by external routines, other
     47  1.1     skrll    functions are only called locally.  elf32_hppa_* functions appear
     48  1.1     skrll    in this file more or less in the order in which they are called
     49  1.1     skrll    from external routines.  eg. elf32_hppa_check_relocs is called
     50  1.1     skrll    early in the link process, elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections is
     51  1.1     skrll    one of the last functions.  */
     52  1.1     skrll 
     53  1.1     skrll /* We use two hash tables to hold information for linking PA ELF objects.
     54  1.1     skrll 
     55  1.1     skrll    The first is the elf32_hppa_link_hash_table which is derived
     56  1.1     skrll    from the standard ELF linker hash table.  We use this as a place to
     57  1.1     skrll    attach other hash tables and static information.
     58  1.1     skrll 
     59  1.1     skrll    The second is the stub hash table which is derived from the
     60  1.1     skrll    base BFD hash table.  The stub hash table holds the information
     61  1.1     skrll    necessary to build the linker stubs during a link.
     62  1.1     skrll 
     63  1.1     skrll    There are a number of different stubs generated by the linker.
     64  1.1     skrll 
     65  1.1     skrll    Long branch stub:
     66  1.1     skrll    :		ldil LR'X,%r1
     67  1.1     skrll    :		be,n RR'X(%sr4,%r1)
     68  1.1     skrll 
     69  1.1     skrll    PIC long branch stub:
     70  1.1     skrll    :		b,l .+8,%r1
     71  1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'X - ($PIC_pcrel$0 - 4),%r1
     72  1.1     skrll    :		be,n RR'X - ($PIC_pcrel$0 - 8)(%sr4,%r1)
     73  1.1     skrll 
     74  1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from normal object file
     75  1.1     skrll    (single sub-space version)
     76  1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'lt_ptr+ltoff,%dp	; get procedure entry point
     77  1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff(%r1),%r21
     78  1.1     skrll    :		bv %r0(%r21)
     79  1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
     80  1.1     skrll 
     81  1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from shared library
     82  1.1     skrll    (single sub-space version)
     83  1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'ltoff,%r19		; get procedure entry point
     84  1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff(%r1),%r21
     85  1.1     skrll    :		bv %r0(%r21)
     86  1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
     87  1.1     skrll 
     88  1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from normal object file
     89  1.1     skrll    (multiple sub-space support)
     90  1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'lt_ptr+ltoff,%dp	; get procedure entry point
     91  1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff(%r1),%r21
     92  1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'lt_ptr+ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
     93  1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%r21),%r1
     94  1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
     95  1.1     skrll    :		be 0(%sr0,%r21)			; branch to target
     96  1.1     skrll    :		stw %rp,-24(%sp)		; save rp
     97  1.1     skrll 
     98  1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from shared library
     99  1.1     skrll    (multiple sub-space support)
    100  1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'ltoff,%r19		; get procedure entry point
    101  1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff(%r1),%r21
    102  1.1     skrll    :		ldw RR'ltoff+4(%r1),%r19	; get new dlt value.
    103  1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%r21),%r1
    104  1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
    105  1.1     skrll    :		be 0(%sr0,%r21)			; branch to target
    106  1.1     skrll    :		stw %rp,-24(%sp)		; save rp
    107  1.1     skrll 
    108  1.1     skrll    Export stub to return from shared lib routine (multiple sub-space support)
    109  1.1     skrll    One of these is created for each exported procedure in a shared
    110  1.1     skrll    library (and stored in the shared lib).  Shared lib routines are
    111  1.1     skrll    called via the first instruction in the export stub so that we can
    112  1.1     skrll    do an inter-space return.  Not required for single sub-space.
    113  1.1     skrll    :		bl,n X,%rp			; trap the return
    114  1.1     skrll    :		nop
    115  1.1     skrll    :		ldw -24(%sp),%rp		; restore the original rp
    116  1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%rp),%r1
    117  1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
    118  1.1     skrll    :		be,n 0(%sr0,%rp)		; inter-space return.  */
    119  1.1     skrll 
    120  1.1     skrll 
    121  1.1     skrll /* Variable names follow a coding style.
    122  1.1     skrll    Please follow this (Apps Hungarian) style:
    123  1.1     skrll 
    124  1.1     skrll    Structure/Variable         		Prefix
    125  1.1     skrll    elf_link_hash_table			"etab"
    126  1.1     skrll    elf_link_hash_entry			"eh"
    127  1.1     skrll 
    128  1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_link_hash_table		"htab"
    129  1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry		"hh"
    130  1.1     skrll 
    131  1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_table			"btab"
    132  1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_entry			"bh"
    133  1.1     skrll 
    134  1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_table containing stubs	"bstab"
    135  1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry		"hsh"
    136  1.1     skrll 
    137  1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry		"hdh"
    138  1.1     skrll 
    139  1.1     skrll    Always remember to use GNU Coding Style. */
    140  1.1     skrll 
    141  1.1     skrll #define PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 8
    142  1.1     skrll #define GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 4
    143  1.1     skrll #define ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER "/lib/ld.so.1"
    144  1.1     skrll 
    145  1.1     skrll static const bfd_byte plt_stub[] =
    146  1.1     skrll {
    147  1.1     skrll   0x0e, 0x80, 0x10, 0x96,  /* 1: ldw	0(%r20),%r22		*/
    148  1.1     skrll   0xea, 0xc0, 0xc0, 0x00,  /*    bv	%r0(%r22)		*/
    149  1.1     skrll   0x0e, 0x88, 0x10, 0x95,  /*    ldw	4(%r20),%r21		*/
    150  1.1     skrll #define PLT_STUB_ENTRY (3*4)
    151  1.1     skrll   0xea, 0x9f, 0x1f, 0xdd,  /*    b,l	1b,%r20			*/
    152  1.1     skrll   0xd6, 0x80, 0x1c, 0x1e,  /*    depi	0,31,2,%r20		*/
    153  1.1     skrll   0x00, 0xc0, 0xff, 0xee,  /* 9: .word	fixup_func		*/
    154  1.1     skrll   0xde, 0xad, 0xbe, 0xef   /*    .word	fixup_ltp		*/
    155  1.1     skrll };
    156  1.1     skrll 
    157  1.1     skrll /* Section name for stubs is the associated section name plus this
    158  1.1     skrll    string.  */
    159  1.1     skrll #define STUB_SUFFIX ".stub"
    160  1.1     skrll 
    161  1.1     skrll /* We don't need to copy certain PC- or GP-relative dynamic relocs
    162  1.1     skrll    into a shared object's dynamic section.  All the relocs of the
    163  1.1     skrll    limited class we are interested in, are absolute.  */
    164  1.1     skrll #ifndef RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
    165  1.1     skrll #define RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS 0
    166  1.1     skrll #define IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC(r_type) 1
    167  1.1     skrll #endif
    168  1.1     skrll 
    169  1.1     skrll /* If ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS is non-zero, the linker will try to avoid
    170  1.1     skrll    copying dynamic variables from a shared lib into an app's dynbss
    171  1.1     skrll    section, and instead use a dynamic relocation to point into the
    172  1.1     skrll    shared lib.  */
    173  1.1     skrll #define ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1
    174  1.1     skrll 
    175  1.1     skrll enum elf32_hppa_stub_type
    176  1.1     skrll {
    177  1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_long_branch,
    178  1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_long_branch_shared,
    179  1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_import,
    180  1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_import_shared,
    181  1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_export,
    182  1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_none
    183  1.1     skrll };
    184  1.1     skrll 
    185  1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry
    186  1.1     skrll {
    187  1.1     skrll   /* Base hash table entry structure.  */
    188  1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_entry bh_root;
    189  1.1     skrll 
    190  1.1     skrll   /* The stub section.  */
    191  1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    192  1.1     skrll 
    193  1.1     skrll   /* Offset within stub_sec of the beginning of this stub.  */
    194  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma stub_offset;
    195  1.1     skrll 
    196  1.1     skrll   /* Given the symbol's value and its section we can determine its final
    197  1.1     skrll      value when building the stubs (so the stub knows where to jump.  */
    198  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma target_value;
    199  1.1     skrll   asection *target_section;
    200  1.1     skrll 
    201  1.1     skrll   enum elf32_hppa_stub_type stub_type;
    202  1.1     skrll 
    203  1.1     skrll   /* The symbol table entry, if any, that this was derived from.  */
    204  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
    205  1.1     skrll 
    206  1.1     skrll   /* Where this stub is being called from, or, in the case of combined
    207  1.1     skrll      stub sections, the first input section in the group.  */
    208  1.1     skrll   asection *id_sec;
    209  1.1     skrll };
    210  1.1     skrll 
    211  1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry
    212  1.1     skrll {
    213  1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry eh;
    214  1.1     skrll 
    215  1.1     skrll   /* A pointer to the most recently used stub hash entry against this
    216  1.1     skrll      symbol.  */
    217  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh_cache;
    218  1.1     skrll 
    219  1.1     skrll   /* Used to count relocations for delayed sizing of relocation
    220  1.1     skrll      sections.  */
    221  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry
    222  1.1     skrll   {
    223  1.1     skrll     /* Next relocation in the chain.  */
    224  1.1     skrll     struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_next;
    225  1.1     skrll 
    226  1.1     skrll     /* The input section of the reloc.  */
    227  1.1     skrll     asection *sec;
    228  1.1     skrll 
    229  1.1     skrll     /* Number of relocs copied in this section.  */
    230  1.1     skrll     bfd_size_type count;
    231  1.1     skrll 
    232  1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
    233  1.1     skrll   /* Number of relative relocs copied for the input section.  */
    234  1.1     skrll     bfd_size_type relative_count;
    235  1.1     skrll #endif
    236  1.1     skrll   } *dyn_relocs;
    237  1.1     skrll 
    238  1.1     skrll   enum
    239  1.1     skrll   {
    240  1.1     skrll     GOT_UNKNOWN = 0, GOT_NORMAL = 1, GOT_TLS_GD = 2, GOT_TLS_LDM = 4, GOT_TLS_IE = 8
    241  1.1     skrll   } tls_type;
    242  1.1     skrll 
    243  1.1     skrll   /* Set if this symbol is used by a plabel reloc.  */
    244  1.1     skrll   unsigned int plabel:1;
    245  1.1     skrll };
    246  1.1     skrll 
    247  1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table
    248  1.1     skrll {
    249  1.1     skrll   /* The main hash table.  */
    250  1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table etab;
    251  1.1     skrll 
    252  1.1     skrll   /* The stub hash table.  */
    253  1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_table bstab;
    254  1.1     skrll 
    255  1.1     skrll   /* Linker stub bfd.  */
    256  1.1     skrll   bfd *stub_bfd;
    257  1.1     skrll 
    258  1.1     skrll   /* Linker call-backs.  */
    259  1.1     skrll   asection * (*add_stub_section) (const char *, asection *);
    260  1.1     skrll   void (*layout_sections_again) (void);
    261  1.1     skrll 
    262  1.1     skrll   /* Array to keep track of which stub sections have been created, and
    263  1.1     skrll      information on stub grouping.  */
    264  1.1     skrll   struct map_stub
    265  1.1     skrll   {
    266  1.1     skrll     /* This is the section to which stubs in the group will be
    267  1.1     skrll        attached.  */
    268  1.1     skrll     asection *link_sec;
    269  1.1     skrll     /* The stub section.  */
    270  1.1     skrll     asection *stub_sec;
    271  1.1     skrll   } *stub_group;
    272  1.1     skrll 
    273  1.1     skrll   /* Assorted information used by elf32_hppa_size_stubs.  */
    274  1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_count;
    275  1.1     skrll   int top_index;
    276  1.1     skrll   asection **input_list;
    277  1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Sym **all_local_syms;
    278  1.1     skrll 
    279  1.1     skrll   /* Short-cuts to get to dynamic linker sections.  */
    280  1.1     skrll   asection *sgot;
    281  1.1     skrll   asection *srelgot;
    282  1.1     skrll   asection *splt;
    283  1.1     skrll   asection *srelplt;
    284  1.1     skrll   asection *sdynbss;
    285  1.1     skrll   asection *srelbss;
    286  1.1     skrll 
    287  1.1     skrll   /* Used during a final link to store the base of the text and data
    288  1.1     skrll      segments so that we can perform SEGREL relocations.  */
    289  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma text_segment_base;
    290  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma data_segment_base;
    291  1.1     skrll 
    292  1.1     skrll   /* Whether we support multiple sub-spaces for shared libs.  */
    293  1.1     skrll   unsigned int multi_subspace:1;
    294  1.1     skrll 
    295  1.1     skrll   /* Flags set when various size branches are detected.  Used to
    296  1.1     skrll      select suitable defaults for the stub group size.  */
    297  1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_12bit_branch:1;
    298  1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_17bit_branch:1;
    299  1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_22bit_branch:1;
    300  1.1     skrll 
    301  1.1     skrll   /* Set if we need a .plt stub to support lazy dynamic linking.  */
    302  1.1     skrll   unsigned int need_plt_stub:1;
    303  1.1     skrll 
    304  1.3  christos   /* Small local sym cache.  */
    305  1.3  christos   struct sym_cache sym_cache;
    306  1.1     skrll 
    307  1.1     skrll   /* Data for LDM relocations.  */
    308  1.1     skrll   union
    309  1.1     skrll   {
    310  1.1     skrll     bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    311  1.1     skrll     bfd_vma offset;
    312  1.1     skrll   } tls_ldm_got;
    313  1.1     skrll };
    314  1.1     skrll 
    315  1.1     skrll /* Various hash macros and functions.  */
    316  1.1     skrll #define hppa_link_hash_table(p) \
    317  1.3  christos   (elf_hash_table_id ((struct elf_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) \
    318  1.3  christos   == HPPA32_ELF_DATA ? ((struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) : NULL)
    319  1.1     skrll 
    320  1.1     skrll #define hppa_elf_hash_entry(ent) \
    321  1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *)(ent))
    322  1.1     skrll 
    323  1.1     skrll #define hppa_stub_hash_entry(ent) \
    324  1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *)(ent))
    325  1.1     skrll 
    326  1.1     skrll #define hppa_stub_hash_lookup(table, string, create, copy) \
    327  1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *) \
    328  1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_lookup ((table), (string), (create), (copy)))
    329  1.1     skrll 
    330  1.1     skrll #define hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type(abfd) \
    331  1.1     skrll   ((char *)(elf_local_got_offsets (abfd) + (elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr.sh_info * 2)))
    332  1.1     skrll 
    333  1.1     skrll #define hh_name(hh) \
    334  1.1     skrll   (hh ? hh->eh.root.root.string : "<undef>")
    335  1.1     skrll 
    336  1.1     skrll #define eh_name(eh) \
    337  1.1     skrll   (eh ? eh->root.root.string : "<undef>")
    338  1.1     skrll 
    339  1.1     skrll /* Assorted hash table functions.  */
    340  1.1     skrll 
    341  1.1     skrll /* Initialize an entry in the stub hash table.  */
    342  1.1     skrll 
    343  1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    344  1.1     skrll stub_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    345  1.1     skrll 		   struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    346  1.1     skrll 		   const char *string)
    347  1.1     skrll {
    348  1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    349  1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    350  1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    351  1.1     skrll     {
    352  1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    353  1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry));
    354  1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    355  1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    356  1.1     skrll     }
    357  1.1     skrll 
    358  1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    359  1.1     skrll   entry = bfd_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    360  1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    361  1.1     skrll     {
    362  1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    363  1.1     skrll 
    364  1.1     skrll       /* Initialize the local fields.  */
    365  1.1     skrll       hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (entry);
    366  1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_sec = NULL;
    367  1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_offset = 0;
    368  1.1     skrll       hsh->target_value = 0;
    369  1.1     skrll       hsh->target_section = NULL;
    370  1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_long_branch;
    371  1.1     skrll       hsh->hh = NULL;
    372  1.1     skrll       hsh->id_sec = NULL;
    373  1.1     skrll     }
    374  1.1     skrll 
    375  1.1     skrll   return entry;
    376  1.1     skrll }
    377  1.1     skrll 
    378  1.1     skrll /* Initialize an entry in the link hash table.  */
    379  1.1     skrll 
    380  1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    381  1.1     skrll hppa_link_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    382  1.1     skrll 			struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    383  1.1     skrll 			const char *string)
    384  1.1     skrll {
    385  1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    386  1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    387  1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    388  1.1     skrll     {
    389  1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    390  1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry));
    391  1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    392  1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    393  1.1     skrll     }
    394  1.1     skrll 
    395  1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    396  1.1     skrll   entry = _bfd_elf_link_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    397  1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    398  1.1     skrll     {
    399  1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
    400  1.1     skrll 
    401  1.1     skrll       /* Initialize the local fields.  */
    402  1.1     skrll       hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (entry);
    403  1.1     skrll       hh->hsh_cache = NULL;
    404  1.1     skrll       hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
    405  1.1     skrll       hh->plabel = 0;
    406  1.1     skrll       hh->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    407  1.1     skrll     }
    408  1.1     skrll 
    409  1.1     skrll   return entry;
    410  1.1     skrll }
    411  1.1     skrll 
    412  1.1     skrll /* Create the derived linker hash table.  The PA ELF port uses the derived
    413  1.1     skrll    hash table to keep information specific to the PA ELF linker (without
    414  1.1     skrll    using static variables).  */
    415  1.1     skrll 
    416  1.1     skrll static struct bfd_link_hash_table *
    417  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_create (bfd *abfd)
    418  1.1     skrll {
    419  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    420  1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt = sizeof (*htab);
    421  1.1     skrll 
    422  1.1     skrll   htab = bfd_malloc (amt);
    423  1.1     skrll   if (htab == NULL)
    424  1.1     skrll     return NULL;
    425  1.1     skrll 
    426  1.1     skrll   if (!_bfd_elf_link_hash_table_init (&htab->etab, abfd, hppa_link_hash_newfunc,
    427  1.3  christos 				      sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry),
    428  1.3  christos 				      HPPA32_ELF_DATA))
    429  1.1     skrll     {
    430  1.1     skrll       free (htab);
    431  1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    432  1.1     skrll     }
    433  1.1     skrll 
    434  1.1     skrll   /* Init the stub hash table too.  */
    435  1.1     skrll   if (!bfd_hash_table_init (&htab->bstab, stub_hash_newfunc,
    436  1.1     skrll 			    sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry)))
    437  1.1     skrll     return NULL;
    438  1.1     skrll 
    439  1.1     skrll   htab->stub_bfd = NULL;
    440  1.1     skrll   htab->add_stub_section = NULL;
    441  1.1     skrll   htab->layout_sections_again = NULL;
    442  1.1     skrll   htab->stub_group = NULL;
    443  1.1     skrll   htab->sgot = NULL;
    444  1.1     skrll   htab->srelgot = NULL;
    445  1.1     skrll   htab->splt = NULL;
    446  1.1     skrll   htab->srelplt = NULL;
    447  1.1     skrll   htab->sdynbss = NULL;
    448  1.1     skrll   htab->srelbss = NULL;
    449  1.1     skrll   htab->text_segment_base = (bfd_vma) -1;
    450  1.1     skrll   htab->data_segment_base = (bfd_vma) -1;
    451  1.1     skrll   htab->multi_subspace = 0;
    452  1.1     skrll   htab->has_12bit_branch = 0;
    453  1.1     skrll   htab->has_17bit_branch = 0;
    454  1.1     skrll   htab->has_22bit_branch = 0;
    455  1.1     skrll   htab->need_plt_stub = 0;
    456  1.3  christos   htab->sym_cache.abfd = NULL;
    457  1.1     skrll   htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount = 0;
    458  1.1     skrll 
    459  1.1     skrll   return &htab->etab.root;
    460  1.1     skrll }
    461  1.1     skrll 
    462  1.1     skrll /* Free the derived linker hash table.  */
    463  1.1     skrll 
    464  1.1     skrll static void
    465  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_free (struct bfd_link_hash_table *btab)
    466  1.1     skrll {
    467  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab
    468  1.1     skrll     = (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *) btab;
    469  1.1     skrll 
    470  1.1     skrll   bfd_hash_table_free (&htab->bstab);
    471  1.1     skrll   _bfd_generic_link_hash_table_free (btab);
    472  1.1     skrll }
    473  1.1     skrll 
    474  1.1     skrll /* Build a name for an entry in the stub hash table.  */
    475  1.1     skrll 
    476  1.1     skrll static char *
    477  1.1     skrll hppa_stub_name (const asection *input_section,
    478  1.1     skrll 		const asection *sym_sec,
    479  1.1     skrll 		const struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    480  1.1     skrll 		const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
    481  1.1     skrll {
    482  1.1     skrll   char *stub_name;
    483  1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type len;
    484  1.1     skrll 
    485  1.1     skrll   if (hh)
    486  1.1     skrll     {
    487  1.1     skrll       len = 8 + 1 + strlen (hh_name (hh)) + 1 + 8 + 1;
    488  1.1     skrll       stub_name = bfd_malloc (len);
    489  1.1     skrll       if (stub_name != NULL)
    490  1.1     skrll 	sprintf (stub_name, "%08x_%s+%x",
    491  1.1     skrll 		 input_section->id & 0xffffffff,
    492  1.1     skrll 		 hh_name (hh),
    493  1.1     skrll 		 (int) rela->r_addend & 0xffffffff);
    494  1.1     skrll     }
    495  1.1     skrll   else
    496  1.1     skrll     {
    497  1.1     skrll       len = 8 + 1 + 8 + 1 + 8 + 1 + 8 + 1;
    498  1.1     skrll       stub_name = bfd_malloc (len);
    499  1.1     skrll       if (stub_name != NULL)
    500  1.1     skrll 	sprintf (stub_name, "%08x_%x:%x+%x",
    501  1.1     skrll 		 input_section->id & 0xffffffff,
    502  1.1     skrll 		 sym_sec->id & 0xffffffff,
    503  1.1     skrll 		 (int) ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) & 0xffffffff,
    504  1.1     skrll 		 (int) rela->r_addend & 0xffffffff);
    505  1.1     skrll     }
    506  1.1     skrll   return stub_name;
    507  1.1     skrll }
    508  1.1     skrll 
    509  1.1     skrll /* Look up an entry in the stub hash.  Stub entries are cached because
    510  1.1     skrll    creating the stub name takes a bit of time.  */
    511  1.1     skrll 
    512  1.1     skrll static struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *
    513  1.1     skrll hppa_get_stub_entry (const asection *input_section,
    514  1.1     skrll 		     const asection *sym_sec,
    515  1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    516  1.1     skrll 		     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
    517  1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab)
    518  1.1     skrll {
    519  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh_entry;
    520  1.1     skrll   const asection *id_sec;
    521  1.1     skrll 
    522  1.1     skrll   /* If this input section is part of a group of sections sharing one
    523  1.1     skrll      stub section, then use the id of the first section in the group.
    524  1.1     skrll      Stub names need to include a section id, as there may well be
    525  1.1     skrll      more than one stub used to reach say, printf, and we need to
    526  1.1     skrll      distinguish between them.  */
    527  1.1     skrll   id_sec = htab->stub_group[input_section->id].link_sec;
    528  1.1     skrll 
    529  1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL && hh->hsh_cache != NULL
    530  1.1     skrll       && hh->hsh_cache->hh == hh
    531  1.1     skrll       && hh->hsh_cache->id_sec == id_sec)
    532  1.1     skrll     {
    533  1.1     skrll       hsh_entry = hh->hsh_cache;
    534  1.1     skrll     }
    535  1.1     skrll   else
    536  1.1     skrll     {
    537  1.1     skrll       char *stub_name;
    538  1.1     skrll 
    539  1.1     skrll       stub_name = hppa_stub_name (id_sec, sym_sec, hh, rela);
    540  1.1     skrll       if (stub_name == NULL)
    541  1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
    542  1.1     skrll 
    543  1.1     skrll       hsh_entry = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
    544  1.1     skrll 					  stub_name, FALSE, FALSE);
    545  1.1     skrll       if (hh != NULL)
    546  1.1     skrll 	hh->hsh_cache = hsh_entry;
    547  1.1     skrll 
    548  1.1     skrll       free (stub_name);
    549  1.1     skrll     }
    550  1.1     skrll 
    551  1.1     skrll   return hsh_entry;
    552  1.1     skrll }
    553  1.1     skrll 
    554  1.1     skrll /* Add a new stub entry to the stub hash.  Not all fields of the new
    555  1.1     skrll    stub entry are initialised.  */
    556  1.1     skrll 
    557  1.1     skrll static struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *
    558  1.1     skrll hppa_add_stub (const char *stub_name,
    559  1.1     skrll 	       asection *section,
    560  1.1     skrll 	       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab)
    561  1.1     skrll {
    562  1.1     skrll   asection *link_sec;
    563  1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    564  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    565  1.1     skrll 
    566  1.1     skrll   link_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].link_sec;
    567  1.1     skrll   stub_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].stub_sec;
    568  1.1     skrll   if (stub_sec == NULL)
    569  1.1     skrll     {
    570  1.1     skrll       stub_sec = htab->stub_group[link_sec->id].stub_sec;
    571  1.1     skrll       if (stub_sec == NULL)
    572  1.1     skrll 	{
    573  1.1     skrll 	  size_t namelen;
    574  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_size_type len;
    575  1.1     skrll 	  char *s_name;
    576  1.1     skrll 
    577  1.1     skrll 	  namelen = strlen (link_sec->name);
    578  1.1     skrll 	  len = namelen + sizeof (STUB_SUFFIX);
    579  1.1     skrll 	  s_name = bfd_alloc (htab->stub_bfd, len);
    580  1.1     skrll 	  if (s_name == NULL)
    581  1.1     skrll 	    return NULL;
    582  1.1     skrll 
    583  1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (s_name, link_sec->name, namelen);
    584  1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (s_name + namelen, STUB_SUFFIX, sizeof (STUB_SUFFIX));
    585  1.1     skrll 	  stub_sec = (*htab->add_stub_section) (s_name, link_sec);
    586  1.1     skrll 	  if (stub_sec == NULL)
    587  1.1     skrll 	    return NULL;
    588  1.1     skrll 	  htab->stub_group[link_sec->id].stub_sec = stub_sec;
    589  1.1     skrll 	}
    590  1.1     skrll       htab->stub_group[section->id].stub_sec = stub_sec;
    591  1.1     skrll     }
    592  1.1     skrll 
    593  1.1     skrll   /* Enter this entry into the linker stub hash table.  */
    594  1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab, stub_name,
    595  1.1     skrll 				      TRUE, FALSE);
    596  1.1     skrll   if (hsh == NULL)
    597  1.1     skrll     {
    598  1.1     skrll       (*_bfd_error_handler) (_("%B: cannot create stub entry %s"),
    599  1.1     skrll 			     section->owner,
    600  1.1     skrll 			     stub_name);
    601  1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    602  1.1     skrll     }
    603  1.1     skrll 
    604  1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_sec = stub_sec;
    605  1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_offset = 0;
    606  1.1     skrll   hsh->id_sec = link_sec;
    607  1.1     skrll   return hsh;
    608  1.1     skrll }
    609  1.1     skrll 
    610  1.1     skrll /* Determine the type of stub needed, if any, for a call.  */
    611  1.1     skrll 
    612  1.1     skrll static enum elf32_hppa_stub_type
    613  1.1     skrll hppa_type_of_stub (asection *input_sec,
    614  1.1     skrll 		   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
    615  1.1     skrll 		   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    616  1.1     skrll 		   bfd_vma destination,
    617  1.1     skrll 		   struct bfd_link_info *info)
    618  1.1     skrll {
    619  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma location;
    620  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma branch_offset;
    621  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma max_branch_offset;
    622  1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type;
    623  1.1     skrll 
    624  1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL
    625  1.1     skrll       && hh->eh.plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
    626  1.1     skrll       && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
    627  1.1     skrll       && !hh->plabel
    628  1.1     skrll       && (info->shared
    629  1.1     skrll 	  || !hh->eh.def_regular
    630  1.1     skrll 	  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
    631  1.1     skrll     {
    632  1.1     skrll       /* We need an import stub.  Decide between hppa_stub_import
    633  1.1     skrll 	 and hppa_stub_import_shared later.  */
    634  1.1     skrll       return hppa_stub_import;
    635  1.1     skrll     }
    636  1.1     skrll 
    637  1.1     skrll   /* Determine where the call point is.  */
    638  1.1     skrll   location = (input_sec->output_offset
    639  1.1     skrll 	      + input_sec->output_section->vma
    640  1.1     skrll 	      + rela->r_offset);
    641  1.1     skrll 
    642  1.1     skrll   branch_offset = destination - location - 8;
    643  1.1     skrll   r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
    644  1.1     skrll 
    645  1.1     skrll   /* Determine if a long branch stub is needed.  parisc branch offsets
    646  1.1     skrll      are relative to the second instruction past the branch, ie. +8
    647  1.1     skrll      bytes on from the branch instruction location.  The offset is
    648  1.1     skrll      signed and counts in units of 4 bytes.  */
    649  1.1     skrll   if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F)
    650  1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (17 - 1)) << 2;
    651  1.1     skrll 
    652  1.1     skrll   else if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F)
    653  1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (12 - 1)) << 2;
    654  1.1     skrll 
    655  1.1     skrll   else /* R_PARISC_PCREL22F.  */
    656  1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (22 - 1)) << 2;
    657  1.1     skrll 
    658  1.1     skrll   if (branch_offset + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
    659  1.1     skrll     return hppa_stub_long_branch;
    660  1.1     skrll 
    661  1.1     skrll   return hppa_stub_none;
    662  1.1     skrll }
    663  1.1     skrll 
    664  1.1     skrll /* Build one linker stub as defined by the stub hash table entry GEN_ENTRY.
    665  1.1     skrll    IN_ARG contains the link info pointer.  */
    666  1.1     skrll 
    667  1.1     skrll #define LDIL_R1		0x20200000	/* ldil  LR'XXX,%r1		*/
    668  1.1     skrll #define BE_SR4_R1	0xe0202002	/* be,n  RR'XXX(%sr4,%r1)	*/
    669  1.1     skrll 
    670  1.1     skrll #define BL_R1		0xe8200000	/* b,l   .+8,%r1		*/
    671  1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_R1	0x28200000	/* addil LR'XXX,%r1,%r1		*/
    672  1.1     skrll #define DEPI_R1		0xd4201c1e	/* depi  0,31,2,%r1		*/
    673  1.1     skrll 
    674  1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_DP	0x2b600000	/* addil LR'XXX,%dp,%r1		*/
    675  1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_R21	0x48350000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%r21	*/
    676  1.1     skrll #define BV_R0_R21	0xeaa0c000	/* bv    %r0(%r21)		*/
    677  1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_R19	0x48330000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%r19	*/
    678  1.1     skrll 
    679  1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_R19	0x2a600000	/* addil LR'XXX,%r19,%r1	*/
    680  1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DP	0x483b0000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%dp	*/
    681  1.1     skrll 
    682  1.1     skrll #define LDSID_R21_R1	0x02a010a1	/* ldsid (%sr0,%r21),%r1	*/
    683  1.1     skrll #define MTSP_R1		0x00011820	/* mtsp  %r1,%sr0		*/
    684  1.1     skrll #define BE_SR0_R21	0xe2a00000	/* be    0(%sr0,%r21)		*/
    685  1.1     skrll #define STW_RP		0x6bc23fd1	/* stw   %rp,-24(%sr0,%sp)	*/
    686  1.1     skrll 
    687  1.1     skrll #define BL22_RP		0xe800a002	/* b,l,n XXX,%rp		*/
    688  1.1     skrll #define BL_RP		0xe8400002	/* b,l,n XXX,%rp		*/
    689  1.1     skrll #define NOP		0x08000240	/* nop				*/
    690  1.1     skrll #define LDW_RP		0x4bc23fd1	/* ldw   -24(%sr0,%sp),%rp	*/
    691  1.1     skrll #define LDSID_RP_R1	0x004010a1	/* ldsid (%sr0,%rp),%r1		*/
    692  1.1     skrll #define BE_SR0_RP	0xe0400002	/* be,n  0(%sr0,%rp)		*/
    693  1.1     skrll 
    694  1.1     skrll #ifndef R19_STUBS
    695  1.1     skrll #define R19_STUBS 1
    696  1.1     skrll #endif
    697  1.1     skrll 
    698  1.1     skrll #if R19_STUBS
    699  1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DLT	LDW_R1_R19
    700  1.1     skrll #else
    701  1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DLT	LDW_R1_DP
    702  1.1     skrll #endif
    703  1.1     skrll 
    704  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    705  1.1     skrll hppa_build_one_stub (struct bfd_hash_entry *bh, void *in_arg)
    706  1.1     skrll {
    707  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    708  1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
    709  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    710  1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    711  1.1     skrll   bfd *stub_bfd;
    712  1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *loc;
    713  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma sym_value;
    714  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma insn;
    715  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma off;
    716  1.1     skrll   int val;
    717  1.1     skrll   int size;
    718  1.1     skrll 
    719  1.1     skrll   /* Massage our args to the form they really have.  */
    720  1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (bh);
    721  1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *)in_arg;
    722  1.1     skrll 
    723  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    724  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    725  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
    726  1.3  christos 
    727  1.1     skrll   stub_sec = hsh->stub_sec;
    728  1.1     skrll 
    729  1.1     skrll   /* Make a note of the offset within the stubs for this entry.  */
    730  1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_offset = stub_sec->size;
    731  1.1     skrll   loc = stub_sec->contents + hsh->stub_offset;
    732  1.1     skrll 
    733  1.1     skrll   stub_bfd = stub_sec->owner;
    734  1.1     skrll 
    735  1.1     skrll   switch (hsh->stub_type)
    736  1.1     skrll     {
    737  1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_long_branch:
    738  1.1     skrll       /* Create the long branch.  A long branch is formed with "ldil"
    739  1.1     skrll 	 loading the upper bits of the target address into a register,
    740  1.1     skrll 	 then branching with "be" which adds in the lower bits.
    741  1.1     skrll 	 The "be" has its delay slot nullified.  */
    742  1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    743  1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    744  1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    745  1.1     skrll 
    746  1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_lrsel);
    747  1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDIL_R1, val, 21);
    748  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    749  1.1     skrll 
    750  1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_rrsel) >> 2;
    751  1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BE_SR4_R1, val, 17);
    752  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    753  1.1     skrll 
    754  1.1     skrll       size = 8;
    755  1.1     skrll       break;
    756  1.1     skrll 
    757  1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_long_branch_shared:
    758  1.1     skrll       /* Branches are relative.  This is where we are going to.  */
    759  1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    760  1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    761  1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    762  1.1     skrll 
    763  1.1     skrll       /* And this is where we are coming from, more or less.  */
    764  1.1     skrll       sym_value -= (hsh->stub_offset
    765  1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_offset
    766  1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_section->vma);
    767  1.1     skrll 
    768  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BL_R1, loc);
    769  1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_lrsel);
    770  1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) ADDIL_R1, val, 21);
    771  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    772  1.1     skrll 
    773  1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_rrsel) >> 2;
    774  1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BE_SR4_R1, val, 17);
    775  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 8);
    776  1.1     skrll       size = 12;
    777  1.1     skrll       break;
    778  1.1     skrll 
    779  1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_import:
    780  1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_import_shared:
    781  1.1     skrll       off = hsh->hh->eh.plt.offset;
    782  1.1     skrll       if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
    783  1.1     skrll 	abort ();
    784  1.1     skrll 
    785  1.1     skrll       off &= ~ (bfd_vma) 1;
    786  1.1     skrll       sym_value = (off
    787  1.1     skrll 		   + htab->splt->output_offset
    788  1.1     skrll 		   + htab->splt->output_section->vma
    789  1.1     skrll 		   - elf_gp (htab->splt->output_section->owner));
    790  1.1     skrll 
    791  1.1     skrll       insn = ADDIL_DP;
    792  1.1     skrll #if R19_STUBS
    793  1.1     skrll       if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_import_shared)
    794  1.1     skrll 	insn = ADDIL_R19;
    795  1.1     skrll #endif
    796  1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_lrsel),
    797  1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) insn, val, 21);
    798  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    799  1.1     skrll 
    800  1.1     skrll       /* It is critical to use lrsel/rrsel here because we are using
    801  1.1     skrll 	 two different offsets (+0 and +4) from sym_value.  If we use
    802  1.1     skrll 	 lsel/rsel then with unfortunate sym_values we will round
    803  1.1     skrll 	 sym_value+4 up to the next 2k block leading to a mis-match
    804  1.1     skrll 	 between the lsel and rsel value.  */
    805  1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_rrsel);
    806  1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDW_R1_R21, val, 14);
    807  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    808  1.1     skrll 
    809  1.1     skrll       if (htab->multi_subspace)
    810  1.1     skrll 	{
    811  1.1     skrll 	  val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) 4, e_rrsel);
    812  1.1     skrll 	  insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDW_R1_DLT, val, 14);
    813  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 8);
    814  1.1     skrll 
    815  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDSID_R21_R1, loc + 12);
    816  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) MTSP_R1,      loc + 16);
    817  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BE_SR0_R21,   loc + 20);
    818  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) STW_RP,       loc + 24);
    819  1.1     skrll 
    820  1.1     skrll 	  size = 28;
    821  1.1     skrll 	}
    822  1.1     skrll       else
    823  1.1     skrll 	{
    824  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BV_R0_R21, loc + 8);
    825  1.1     skrll 	  val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) 4, e_rrsel);
    826  1.1     skrll 	  insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDW_R1_DLT, val, 14);
    827  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 12);
    828  1.1     skrll 
    829  1.1     skrll 	  size = 16;
    830  1.1     skrll 	}
    831  1.1     skrll 
    832  1.1     skrll       break;
    833  1.1     skrll 
    834  1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_export:
    835  1.1     skrll       /* Branches are relative.  This is where we are going to.  */
    836  1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    837  1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    838  1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    839  1.1     skrll 
    840  1.1     skrll       /* And this is where we are coming from.  */
    841  1.1     skrll       sym_value -= (hsh->stub_offset
    842  1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_offset
    843  1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_section->vma);
    844  1.1     skrll 
    845  1.1     skrll       if (sym_value - 8 + (1 << (17 + 1)) >= (1 << (17 + 2))
    846  1.1     skrll 	  && (!htab->has_22bit_branch
    847  1.1     skrll 	      || sym_value - 8 + (1 << (22 + 1)) >= (1 << (22 + 2))))
    848  1.1     skrll 	{
    849  1.1     skrll 	  (*_bfd_error_handler)
    850  1.1     skrll 	    (_("%B(%A+0x%lx): cannot reach %s, recompile with -ffunction-sections"),
    851  1.1     skrll 	     hsh->target_section->owner,
    852  1.1     skrll 	     stub_sec,
    853  1.1     skrll 	     (long) hsh->stub_offset,
    854  1.1     skrll 	     hsh->bh_root.string);
    855  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
    856  1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
    857  1.1     skrll 	}
    858  1.1     skrll 
    859  1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_fsel) >> 2;
    860  1.1     skrll       if (!htab->has_22bit_branch)
    861  1.1     skrll 	insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BL_RP, val, 17);
    862  1.1     skrll       else
    863  1.1     skrll 	insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BL22_RP, val, 22);
    864  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    865  1.1     skrll 
    866  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) NOP,         loc + 4);
    867  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_RP,      loc + 8);
    868  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDSID_RP_R1, loc + 12);
    869  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) MTSP_R1,     loc + 16);
    870  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BE_SR0_RP,   loc + 20);
    871  1.1     skrll 
    872  1.1     skrll       /* Point the function symbol at the stub.  */
    873  1.1     skrll       hsh->hh->eh.root.u.def.section = stub_sec;
    874  1.1     skrll       hsh->hh->eh.root.u.def.value = stub_sec->size;
    875  1.1     skrll 
    876  1.1     skrll       size = 24;
    877  1.1     skrll       break;
    878  1.1     skrll 
    879  1.1     skrll     default:
    880  1.1     skrll       BFD_FAIL ();
    881  1.1     skrll       return FALSE;
    882  1.1     skrll     }
    883  1.1     skrll 
    884  1.1     skrll   stub_sec->size += size;
    885  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    886  1.1     skrll }
    887  1.1     skrll 
    888  1.1     skrll #undef LDIL_R1
    889  1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR4_R1
    890  1.1     skrll #undef BL_R1
    891  1.1     skrll #undef ADDIL_R1
    892  1.1     skrll #undef DEPI_R1
    893  1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_R21
    894  1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_DLT
    895  1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_R19
    896  1.1     skrll #undef ADDIL_R19
    897  1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_DP
    898  1.1     skrll #undef LDSID_R21_R1
    899  1.1     skrll #undef MTSP_R1
    900  1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR0_R21
    901  1.1     skrll #undef STW_RP
    902  1.1     skrll #undef BV_R0_R21
    903  1.1     skrll #undef BL_RP
    904  1.1     skrll #undef NOP
    905  1.1     skrll #undef LDW_RP
    906  1.1     skrll #undef LDSID_RP_R1
    907  1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR0_RP
    908  1.1     skrll 
    909  1.1     skrll /* As above, but don't actually build the stub.  Just bump offset so
    910  1.1     skrll    we know stub section sizes.  */
    911  1.1     skrll 
    912  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    913  1.1     skrll hppa_size_one_stub (struct bfd_hash_entry *bh, void *in_arg)
    914  1.1     skrll {
    915  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    916  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    917  1.1     skrll   int size;
    918  1.1     skrll 
    919  1.1     skrll   /* Massage our args to the form they really have.  */
    920  1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (bh);
    921  1.1     skrll   htab = in_arg;
    922  1.1     skrll 
    923  1.1     skrll   if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch)
    924  1.1     skrll     size = 8;
    925  1.1     skrll   else if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch_shared)
    926  1.1     skrll     size = 12;
    927  1.1     skrll   else if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_export)
    928  1.1     skrll     size = 24;
    929  1.1     skrll   else /* hppa_stub_import or hppa_stub_import_shared.  */
    930  1.1     skrll     {
    931  1.1     skrll       if (htab->multi_subspace)
    932  1.1     skrll 	size = 28;
    933  1.1     skrll       else
    934  1.1     skrll 	size = 16;
    935  1.1     skrll     }
    936  1.1     skrll 
    937  1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_sec->size += size;
    938  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    939  1.1     skrll }
    940  1.1     skrll 
    941  1.1     skrll /* Return nonzero if ABFD represents an HPPA ELF32 file.
    942  1.1     skrll    Additionally we set the default architecture and machine.  */
    943  1.1     skrll 
    944  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    945  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_object_p (bfd *abfd)
    946  1.1     skrll {
    947  1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Ehdr * i_ehdrp;
    948  1.1     skrll   unsigned int flags;
    949  1.1     skrll 
    950  1.1     skrll   i_ehdrp = elf_elfheader (abfd);
    951  1.1     skrll   if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-linux") == 0)
    952  1.1     skrll     {
    953  1.1     skrll       /* GCC on hppa-linux produces binaries with OSABI=Linux,
    954  1.1     skrll 	 but the kernel produces corefiles with OSABI=SysV.  */
    955  1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_LINUX &&
    956  1.1     skrll 	  i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NONE) /* aka SYSV */
    957  1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    958  1.1     skrll     }
    959  1.1     skrll   else if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") == 0)
    960  1.1     skrll     {
    961  1.1     skrll       /* GCC on hppa-netbsd produces binaries with OSABI=NetBSD,
    962  1.1     skrll 	 but the kernel produces corefiles with OSABI=SysV.  */
    963  1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NETBSD &&
    964  1.1     skrll 	  i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NONE) /* aka SYSV */
    965  1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    966  1.1     skrll     }
    967  1.1     skrll   else
    968  1.1     skrll     {
    969  1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_HPUX)
    970  1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    971  1.1     skrll     }
    972  1.1     skrll 
    973  1.1     skrll   flags = i_ehdrp->e_flags;
    974  1.1     skrll   switch (flags & (EF_PARISC_ARCH | EF_PARISC_WIDE))
    975  1.1     skrll     {
    976  1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_1_0:
    977  1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 10);
    978  1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_1_1:
    979  1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 11);
    980  1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_2_0:
    981  1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 20);
    982  1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_2_0 | EF_PARISC_WIDE:
    983  1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 25);
    984  1.1     skrll     }
    985  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    986  1.1     skrll }
    987  1.1     skrll 
    988  1.1     skrll /* Create the .plt and .got sections, and set up our hash table
    989  1.1     skrll    short-cuts to various dynamic sections.  */
    990  1.1     skrll 
    991  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    992  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
    993  1.1     skrll {
    994  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    995  1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh;
    996  1.1     skrll 
    997  1.1     skrll   /* Don't try to create the .plt and .got twice.  */
    998  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    999  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1000  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1001  1.1     skrll   if (htab->splt != NULL)
   1002  1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1003  1.1     skrll 
   1004  1.1     skrll   /* Call the generic code to do most of the work.  */
   1005  1.1     skrll   if (! _bfd_elf_create_dynamic_sections (abfd, info))
   1006  1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
   1007  1.1     skrll 
   1008  1.1     skrll   htab->splt = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".plt");
   1009  1.1     skrll   htab->srelplt = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".rela.plt");
   1010  1.1     skrll 
   1011  1.1     skrll   htab->sgot = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".got");
   1012  1.3  christos   htab->srelgot = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".rela.got");
   1013  1.1     skrll 
   1014  1.1     skrll   htab->sdynbss = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".dynbss");
   1015  1.1     skrll   htab->srelbss = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".rela.bss");
   1016  1.1     skrll 
   1017  1.1     skrll   /* hppa-linux needs _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ to be visible from the main
   1018  1.1     skrll      application, because __canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare needs it.  */
   1019  1.1     skrll   eh = elf_hash_table (info)->hgot;
   1020  1.1     skrll   eh->forced_local = 0;
   1021  1.1     skrll   eh->other = STV_DEFAULT;
   1022  1.1     skrll   return bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh);
   1023  1.1     skrll }
   1024  1.1     skrll 
   1025  1.1     skrll /* Copy the extra info we tack onto an elf_link_hash_entry.  */
   1026  1.1     skrll 
   1027  1.1     skrll static void
   1028  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_copy_indirect_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1029  1.1     skrll 				 struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh_dir,
   1030  1.1     skrll 				 struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh_ind)
   1031  1.1     skrll {
   1032  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh_dir, *hh_ind;
   1033  1.1     skrll 
   1034  1.1     skrll   hh_dir = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_dir);
   1035  1.1     skrll   hh_ind = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_ind);
   1036  1.1     skrll 
   1037  1.1     skrll   if (hh_ind->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   1038  1.1     skrll     {
   1039  1.1     skrll       if (hh_dir->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   1040  1.1     skrll 	{
   1041  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry **hdh_pp;
   1042  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   1043  1.1     skrll 
   1044  1.1     skrll 	  /* Add reloc counts against the indirect sym to the direct sym
   1045  1.1     skrll 	     list.  Merge any entries against the same section.  */
   1046  1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_pp = &hh_ind->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; )
   1047  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1048  1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_q;
   1049  1.1     skrll 
   1050  1.1     skrll 	      for (hdh_q = hh_dir->dyn_relocs;
   1051  1.1     skrll 		   hdh_q != NULL;
   1052  1.1     skrll 		   hdh_q = hdh_q->hdh_next)
   1053  1.1     skrll 		if (hdh_q->sec == hdh_p->sec)
   1054  1.1     skrll 		  {
   1055  1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1056  1.1     skrll 		    hdh_q->relative_count += hdh_p->relative_count;
   1057  1.1     skrll #endif
   1058  1.1     skrll 		    hdh_q->count += hdh_p->count;
   1059  1.1     skrll 		    *hdh_pp = hdh_p->hdh_next;
   1060  1.1     skrll 		    break;
   1061  1.1     skrll 		  }
   1062  1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_q == NULL)
   1063  1.1     skrll 		hdh_pp = &hdh_p->hdh_next;
   1064  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1065  1.1     skrll 	  *hdh_pp = hh_dir->dyn_relocs;
   1066  1.1     skrll 	}
   1067  1.1     skrll 
   1068  1.1     skrll       hh_dir->dyn_relocs = hh_ind->dyn_relocs;
   1069  1.1     skrll       hh_ind->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1070  1.1     skrll     }
   1071  1.1     skrll 
   1072  1.1     skrll   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1073  1.1     skrll       && eh_ind->root.type != bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1074  1.1     skrll       && eh_dir->dynamic_adjusted)
   1075  1.1     skrll     {
   1076  1.1     skrll       /* If called to transfer flags for a weakdef during processing
   1077  1.1     skrll 	 of elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol, don't copy non_got_ref.
   1078  1.1     skrll 	 We clear it ourselves for ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS.  */
   1079  1.1     skrll       eh_dir->ref_dynamic |= eh_ind->ref_dynamic;
   1080  1.1     skrll       eh_dir->ref_regular |= eh_ind->ref_regular;
   1081  1.1     skrll       eh_dir->ref_regular_nonweak |= eh_ind->ref_regular_nonweak;
   1082  1.1     skrll       eh_dir->needs_plt |= eh_ind->needs_plt;
   1083  1.1     skrll     }
   1084  1.1     skrll   else
   1085  1.1     skrll     {
   1086  1.1     skrll       if (eh_ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1087  1.1     skrll           && eh_dir->got.refcount <= 0)
   1088  1.1     skrll         {
   1089  1.1     skrll           hh_dir->tls_type = hh_ind->tls_type;
   1090  1.1     skrll           hh_ind->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   1091  1.1     skrll         }
   1092  1.1     skrll 
   1093  1.1     skrll       _bfd_elf_link_hash_copy_indirect (info, eh_dir, eh_ind);
   1094  1.1     skrll     }
   1095  1.1     skrll }
   1096  1.1     skrll 
   1097  1.1     skrll static int
   1098  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   1099  1.1     skrll 				int r_type, int is_local ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
   1100  1.1     skrll {
   1101  1.1     skrll   /* For now we don't support linker optimizations.  */
   1102  1.1     skrll   return r_type;
   1103  1.1     skrll }
   1104  1.1     skrll 
   1105  1.3  christos /* Return a pointer to the local GOT, PLT and TLS reference counts
   1106  1.3  christos    for ABFD.  Returns NULL if the storage allocation fails.  */
   1107  1.3  christos 
   1108  1.3  christos static bfd_signed_vma *
   1109  1.3  christos hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (bfd *abfd)
   1110  1.3  christos {
   1111  1.3  christos   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1112  1.3  christos   bfd_signed_vma *local_refcounts;
   1113  1.3  christos 
   1114  1.3  christos   local_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
   1115  1.3  christos   if (local_refcounts == NULL)
   1116  1.3  christos     {
   1117  1.3  christos       bfd_size_type size;
   1118  1.3  christos 
   1119  1.3  christos       /* Allocate space for local GOT and PLT reference
   1120  1.3  christos 	 counts.  Done this way to save polluting elf_obj_tdata
   1121  1.3  christos 	 with another target specific pointer.  */
   1122  1.3  christos       size = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1123  1.3  christos       size *= 2 * sizeof (bfd_signed_vma);
   1124  1.3  christos       /* Add in space to store the local GOT TLS types.  */
   1125  1.3  christos       size += symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1126  1.3  christos       local_refcounts = bfd_zalloc (abfd, size);
   1127  1.3  christos       if (local_refcounts == NULL)
   1128  1.3  christos 	return NULL;
   1129  1.3  christos       elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd) = local_refcounts;
   1130  1.3  christos       memset (hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd), GOT_UNKNOWN,
   1131  1.3  christos 	      symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   1132  1.3  christos     }
   1133  1.3  christos   return local_refcounts;
   1134  1.3  christos }
   1135  1.3  christos 
   1136  1.3  christos 
   1137  1.1     skrll /* Look through the relocs for a section during the first phase, and
   1138  1.1     skrll    calculate needed space in the global offset table, procedure linkage
   1139  1.1     skrll    table, and dynamic reloc sections.  At this point we haven't
   1140  1.1     skrll    necessarily read all the input files.  */
   1141  1.1     skrll 
   1142  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1143  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_check_relocs (bfd *abfd,
   1144  1.1     skrll 			 struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1145  1.1     skrll 			 asection *sec,
   1146  1.1     skrll 			 const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
   1147  1.1     skrll {
   1148  1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1149  1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   1150  1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela;
   1151  1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela_end;
   1152  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1153  1.1     skrll   asection *sreloc;
   1154  1.1     skrll   int tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN, old_tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   1155  1.1     skrll 
   1156  1.1     skrll   if (info->relocatable)
   1157  1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1158  1.1     skrll 
   1159  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1160  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1161  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1162  1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1163  1.1     skrll   eh_syms = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
   1164  1.1     skrll   sreloc = NULL;
   1165  1.1     skrll 
   1166  1.1     skrll   rela_end = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
   1167  1.1     skrll   for (rela = relocs; rela < rela_end; rela++)
   1168  1.1     skrll     {
   1169  1.1     skrll       enum {
   1170  1.1     skrll 	NEED_GOT = 1,
   1171  1.1     skrll 	NEED_PLT = 2,
   1172  1.1     skrll 	NEED_DYNREL = 4,
   1173  1.1     skrll 	PLT_PLABEL = 8
   1174  1.1     skrll       };
   1175  1.1     skrll 
   1176  1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_symndx, r_type;
   1177  1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1178  1.1     skrll       int need_entry = 0;
   1179  1.1     skrll 
   1180  1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   1181  1.1     skrll 
   1182  1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   1183  1.1     skrll 	hh = NULL;
   1184  1.1     skrll       else
   1185  1.1     skrll 	{
   1186  1.1     skrll 	  hh =  hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_syms[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info]);
   1187  1.1     skrll 	  while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1188  1.1     skrll 		 || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1189  1.1     skrll 	    hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   1190  1.1     skrll 	}
   1191  1.1     skrll 
   1192  1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   1193  1.1     skrll       r_type = elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (info, r_type, hh == NULL);
   1194  1.1     skrll 
   1195  1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   1196  1.1     skrll 	{
   1197  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   1198  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   1199  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   1200  1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a global offset table entry.  */
   1201  1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1202  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1203  1.1     skrll 
   1204  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R: /* "Official" procedure labels.  */
   1205  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   1206  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   1207  1.1     skrll 	  /* If the addend is non-zero, we break badly.  */
   1208  1.1     skrll 	  if (rela->r_addend != 0)
   1209  1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   1210  1.1     skrll 
   1211  1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, then we need to
   1212  1.1     skrll 	     create a PLT entry for all PLABELs, because PLABELs with
   1213  1.1     skrll 	     local symbols may be passed via a pointer to another
   1214  1.1     skrll 	     object.  Additionally, output a dynamic relocation
   1215  1.1     skrll 	     pointing to the PLT entry.
   1216  1.1     skrll 
   1217  1.1     skrll 	     For executables, the original 32-bit ABI allowed two
   1218  1.1     skrll 	     different styles of PLABELs (function pointers):  For
   1219  1.1     skrll 	     global functions, the PLABEL word points into the .plt
   1220  1.1     skrll 	     two bytes past a (function address, gp) pair, and for
   1221  1.1     skrll 	     local functions the PLABEL points directly at the
   1222  1.1     skrll 	     function.  The magic +2 for the first type allows us to
   1223  1.1     skrll 	     differentiate between the two.  As you can imagine, this
   1224  1.1     skrll 	     is a real pain when it comes to generating code to call
   1225  1.1     skrll 	     functions indirectly or to compare function pointers.
   1226  1.1     skrll 	     We avoid the mess by always pointing a PLABEL into the
   1227  1.1     skrll 	     .plt, even for local functions.  */
   1228  1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = PLT_PLABEL | NEED_PLT | NEED_DYNREL;
   1229  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1230  1.1     skrll 
   1231  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   1232  1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_12bit_branch = 1;
   1233  1.1     skrll 	  goto branch_common;
   1234  1.1     skrll 
   1235  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   1236  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   1237  1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_17bit_branch = 1;
   1238  1.1     skrll 	  goto branch_common;
   1239  1.1     skrll 
   1240  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   1241  1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_22bit_branch = 1;
   1242  1.1     skrll 	branch_common:
   1243  1.1     skrll 	  /* Function calls might need to go through the .plt, and
   1244  1.1     skrll 	     might require long branch stubs.  */
   1245  1.1     skrll 	  if (hh == NULL)
   1246  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1247  1.1     skrll 	      /* We know local syms won't need a .plt entry, and if
   1248  1.1     skrll 		 they need a long branch stub we can't guarantee that
   1249  1.1     skrll 		 we can reach the stub.  So just flag an error later
   1250  1.1     skrll 		 if we're doing a shared link and find we need a long
   1251  1.1     skrll 		 branch stub.  */
   1252  1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   1253  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1254  1.1     skrll 	  else
   1255  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1256  1.1     skrll 	      /* Global symbols will need a .plt entry if they remain
   1257  1.1     skrll 		 global, and in most cases won't need a long branch
   1258  1.1     skrll 		 stub.  Unfortunately, we have to cater for the case
   1259  1.1     skrll 		 where a symbol is forced local by versioning, or due
   1260  1.1     skrll 		 to symbolic linking, and we lose the .plt entry.  */
   1261  1.1     skrll 	      need_entry = NEED_PLT;
   1262  1.1     skrll 	      if (hh->eh.type == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   1263  1.1     skrll 		need_entry = 0;
   1264  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1265  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1266  1.1     skrll 
   1267  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGBASE:  /* Used to set segment base.  */
   1268  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGREL32: /* Relative reloc, used for unwind.  */
   1269  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL14F: /* PC relative load/store.  */
   1270  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   1271  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17R: /* External branches.  */
   1272  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL21L: /* As above, and for load/store too.  */
   1273  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   1274  1.1     skrll 	  /* We don't need to propagate the relocation if linking a
   1275  1.1     skrll 	     shared object since these are section relative.  */
   1276  1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1277  1.1     skrll 
   1278  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14F: /* Used for gp rel data load/store.  */
   1279  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   1280  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   1281  1.1     skrll 	  if (info->shared)
   1282  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1283  1.1     skrll 	      (*_bfd_error_handler)
   1284  1.1     skrll 		(_("%B: relocation %s can not be used when making a shared object; recompile with -fPIC"),
   1285  1.1     skrll 		 abfd,
   1286  1.1     skrll 		 elf_hppa_howto_table[r_type].name);
   1287  1.1     skrll 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1288  1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   1289  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1290  1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   1291  1.1     skrll 
   1292  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17F: /* Used for external branches.  */
   1293  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   1294  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14F: /* Used for load/store from absolute locn.  */
   1295  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   1296  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR21L: /* As above, and for ext branches too.  */
   1297  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR32: /* .word relocs.  */
   1298  1.1     skrll 	  /* We may want to output a dynamic relocation later.  */
   1299  1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_DYNREL;
   1300  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1301  1.1     skrll 
   1302  1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes the C++ object vtable hierarchy.
   1303  1.1     skrll 	     Reconstruct it for later use during GC.  */
   1304  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1305  1.1     skrll 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtinherit (abfd, sec, &hh->eh, rela->r_offset))
   1306  1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1307  1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1308  1.1     skrll 
   1309  1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes which C++ vtable entries are actually
   1310  1.1     skrll 	     used.  Record for later use during GC.  */
   1311  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1312  1.1     skrll 	  BFD_ASSERT (hh != NULL);
   1313  1.1     skrll 	  if (hh != NULL
   1314  1.1     skrll 	      && !bfd_elf_gc_record_vtentry (abfd, sec, &hh->eh, rela->r_addend))
   1315  1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1316  1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1317  1.1     skrll 
   1318  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1319  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1320  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1321  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1322  1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1323  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1324  1.1     skrll 
   1325  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1326  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1327  1.1     skrll 	  if (info->shared)
   1328  1.1     skrll             info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1329  1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1330  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1331  1.1     skrll 
   1332  1.1     skrll 	default:
   1333  1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1334  1.1     skrll 	}
   1335  1.1     skrll 
   1336  1.1     skrll       /* Now carry out our orders.  */
   1337  1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_GOT)
   1338  1.1     skrll 	{
   1339  1.1     skrll 	  switch (r_type)
   1340  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1341  1.1     skrll 	    default:
   1342  1.1     skrll 	      tls_type = GOT_NORMAL;
   1343  1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1344  1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1345  1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1346  1.1     skrll 	      tls_type |= GOT_TLS_GD;
   1347  1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1348  1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1349  1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1350  1.1     skrll 	      tls_type |= GOT_TLS_LDM;
   1351  1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1352  1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1353  1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1354  1.1     skrll 	      tls_type |= GOT_TLS_IE;
   1355  1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1356  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1357  1.1     skrll 
   1358  1.1     skrll 	  /* Allocate space for a GOT entry, as well as a dynamic
   1359  1.1     skrll 	     relocation for this entry.  */
   1360  1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->sgot == NULL)
   1361  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1362  1.1     skrll 	      if (htab->etab.dynobj == NULL)
   1363  1.1     skrll 		htab->etab.dynobj = abfd;
   1364  1.1     skrll 	      if (!elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections (htab->etab.dynobj, info))
   1365  1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   1366  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1367  1.1     skrll 
   1368  1.1     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L
   1369  1.1     skrll 	      || r_type == R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R)
   1370  1.3  christos 	    htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1371  1.1     skrll 	  else
   1372  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1373  1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1374  1.1     skrll 	        {
   1375  1.1     skrll 	          hh->eh.got.refcount += 1;
   1376  1.1     skrll 	          old_tls_type = hh->tls_type;
   1377  1.1     skrll 	        }
   1378  1.1     skrll 	      else
   1379  1.1     skrll 	        {
   1380  1.1     skrll 	          bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1381  1.1     skrll 
   1382  1.1     skrll 	          /* This is a global offset table entry for a local symbol.  */
   1383  1.3  christos 	          local_got_refcounts = hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (abfd);
   1384  1.1     skrll 	          if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1385  1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1386  1.1     skrll 	          local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1387  1.1     skrll 
   1388  1.1     skrll 	          old_tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx];
   1389  1.1     skrll 	        }
   1390  1.1     skrll 
   1391  1.1     skrll 	      tls_type |= old_tls_type;
   1392  1.1     skrll 
   1393  1.1     skrll 	      if (old_tls_type != tls_type)
   1394  1.1     skrll 	        {
   1395  1.1     skrll 	          if (hh != NULL)
   1396  1.1     skrll 		    hh->tls_type = tls_type;
   1397  1.1     skrll 	          else
   1398  1.1     skrll 		    hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx] = tls_type;
   1399  1.1     skrll 	        }
   1400  1.1     skrll 
   1401  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1402  1.1     skrll 	}
   1403  1.1     skrll 
   1404  1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_PLT)
   1405  1.1     skrll 	{
   1406  1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, and this is a reloc
   1407  1.1     skrll 	     against a weak symbol or a global symbol in a dynamic
   1408  1.1     skrll 	     object, then we will be creating an import stub and a
   1409  1.1     skrll 	     .plt entry for the symbol.  Similarly, on a normal link
   1410  1.1     skrll 	     to symbols defined in a dynamic object we'll need the
   1411  1.1     skrll 	     import stub and a .plt entry.  We don't know yet whether
   1412  1.1     skrll 	     the symbol is defined or not, so make an entry anyway and
   1413  1.1     skrll 	     clean up later in adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   1414  1.1     skrll 	  if ((sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
   1415  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1416  1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1417  1.1     skrll 		{
   1418  1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.needs_plt = 1;
   1419  1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.plt.refcount += 1;
   1420  1.1     skrll 
   1421  1.1     skrll 		  /* If this .plt entry is for a plabel, mark it so
   1422  1.1     skrll 		     that adjust_dynamic_symbol will keep the entry
   1423  1.1     skrll 		     even if it appears to be local.  */
   1424  1.1     skrll 		  if (need_entry & PLT_PLABEL)
   1425  1.1     skrll 		    hh->plabel = 1;
   1426  1.1     skrll 		}
   1427  1.1     skrll 	      else if (need_entry & PLT_PLABEL)
   1428  1.1     skrll 		{
   1429  1.1     skrll 		  bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1430  1.1     skrll 		  bfd_signed_vma *local_plt_refcounts;
   1431  1.1     skrll 
   1432  1.3  christos 		  local_got_refcounts = hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (abfd);
   1433  1.1     skrll 		  if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1434  1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1435  1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_refcounts = (local_got_refcounts
   1436  1.1     skrll 					 + symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   1437  1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1438  1.1     skrll 		}
   1439  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1440  1.1     skrll 	}
   1441  1.1     skrll 
   1442  1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_DYNREL)
   1443  1.1     skrll 	{
   1444  1.1     skrll 	  /* Flag this symbol as having a non-got, non-plt reference
   1445  1.1     skrll 	     so that we generate copy relocs if it turns out to be
   1446  1.1     skrll 	     dynamic.  */
   1447  1.1     skrll 	  if (hh != NULL && !info->shared)
   1448  1.1     skrll 	    hh->eh.non_got_ref = 1;
   1449  1.1     skrll 
   1450  1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library then we need to copy
   1451  1.1     skrll 	     the reloc into the shared library.  However, if we are
   1452  1.1     skrll 	     linking with -Bsymbolic, we need only copy absolute
   1453  1.1     skrll 	     relocs or relocs against symbols that are not defined in
   1454  1.1     skrll 	     an object we are including in the link.  PC- or DP- or
   1455  1.1     skrll 	     DLT-relative relocs against any local sym or global sym
   1456  1.1     skrll 	     with DEF_REGULAR set, can be discarded.  At this point we
   1457  1.1     skrll 	     have not seen all the input files, so it is possible that
   1458  1.1     skrll 	     DEF_REGULAR is not set now but will be set later (it is
   1459  1.1     skrll 	     never cleared).  We account for that possibility below by
   1460  1.1     skrll 	     storing information in the dyn_relocs field of the
   1461  1.1     skrll 	     hash table entry.
   1462  1.1     skrll 
   1463  1.1     skrll 	     A similar situation to the -Bsymbolic case occurs when
   1464  1.1     skrll 	     creating shared libraries and symbol visibility changes
   1465  1.1     skrll 	     render the symbol local.
   1466  1.1     skrll 
   1467  1.1     skrll 	     As it turns out, all the relocs we will be creating here
   1468  1.1     skrll 	     are absolute, so we cannot remove them on -Bsymbolic
   1469  1.1     skrll 	     links or visibility changes anyway.  A STUB_REL reloc
   1470  1.1     skrll 	     is absolute too, as in that case it is the reloc in the
   1471  1.1     skrll 	     stub we will be creating, rather than copying the PCREL
   1472  1.1     skrll 	     reloc in the branch.
   1473  1.1     skrll 
   1474  1.1     skrll 	     If on the other hand, we are creating an executable, we
   1475  1.1     skrll 	     may need to keep relocations for symbols satisfied by a
   1476  1.1     skrll 	     dynamic library if we manage to avoid copy relocs for the
   1477  1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1478  1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->shared
   1479  1.1     skrll 	       && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
   1480  1.1     skrll 	       && (IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   1481  1.1     skrll 		   || (hh != NULL
   1482  1.1     skrll 		       && (!info->symbolic
   1483  1.1     skrll 			   || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1484  1.1     skrll 			   || !hh->eh.def_regular))))
   1485  1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1486  1.1     skrll 		  && !info->shared
   1487  1.1     skrll 		  && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0
   1488  1.1     skrll 		  && hh != NULL
   1489  1.1     skrll 		  && (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1490  1.1     skrll 		      || !hh->eh.def_regular)))
   1491  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1492  1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   1493  1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry **hdh_head;
   1494  1.1     skrll 
   1495  1.1     skrll 	      /* Create a reloc section in dynobj and make room for
   1496  1.1     skrll 		 this reloc.  */
   1497  1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   1498  1.1     skrll 		{
   1499  1.1     skrll 		  if (htab->etab.dynobj == NULL)
   1500  1.1     skrll 		    htab->etab.dynobj = abfd;
   1501  1.1     skrll 
   1502  1.3  christos 		  sreloc = _bfd_elf_make_dynamic_reloc_section
   1503  1.3  christos 		    (sec, htab->etab.dynobj, 2, abfd, /*rela?*/ TRUE);
   1504  1.3  christos 
   1505  1.1     skrll 		  if (sreloc == NULL)
   1506  1.1     skrll 		    {
   1507  1.3  christos 		      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1508  1.3  christos 		      return FALSE;
   1509  1.1     skrll 		    }
   1510  1.1     skrll 		}
   1511  1.1     skrll 
   1512  1.1     skrll 	      /* If this is a global symbol, we count the number of
   1513  1.1     skrll 		 relocations we need for this symbol.  */
   1514  1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1515  1.1     skrll 		{
   1516  1.1     skrll 		  hdh_head = &hh->dyn_relocs;
   1517  1.1     skrll 		}
   1518  1.1     skrll 	      else
   1519  1.1     skrll 		{
   1520  1.1     skrll 		  /* Track dynamic relocs needed for local syms too.
   1521  1.1     skrll 		     We really need local syms available to do this
   1522  1.1     skrll 		     easily.  Oh well.  */
   1523  1.1     skrll 		  asection *sr;
   1524  1.1     skrll 		  void *vpp;
   1525  1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
   1526  1.3  christos 
   1527  1.3  christos 		  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
   1528  1.3  christos 						abfd, r_symndx);
   1529  1.3  christos 		  if (isym == NULL)
   1530  1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1531  1.1     skrll 
   1532  1.3  christos 		  sr = bfd_section_from_elf_index (abfd, isym->st_shndx);
   1533  1.1     skrll 		  if (sr == NULL)
   1534  1.3  christos 		    sr = sec;
   1535  1.1     skrll 
   1536  1.1     skrll 		  vpp = &elf_section_data (sr)->local_dynrel;
   1537  1.1     skrll 		  hdh_head = (struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry **) vpp;
   1538  1.1     skrll 		}
   1539  1.1     skrll 
   1540  1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p = *hdh_head;
   1541  1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_p == NULL || hdh_p->sec != sec)
   1542  1.1     skrll 		{
   1543  1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p = bfd_alloc (htab->etab.dynobj, sizeof *hdh_p);
   1544  1.1     skrll 		  if (hdh_p == NULL)
   1545  1.1     skrll 		    return FALSE;
   1546  1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->hdh_next = *hdh_head;
   1547  1.1     skrll 		  *hdh_head = hdh_p;
   1548  1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->sec = sec;
   1549  1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->count = 0;
   1550  1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1551  1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->relative_count = 0;
   1552  1.1     skrll #endif
   1553  1.1     skrll 		}
   1554  1.1     skrll 
   1555  1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p->count += 1;
   1556  1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1557  1.1     skrll 	      if (!IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (rtype))
   1558  1.1     skrll 		hdh_p->relative_count += 1;
   1559  1.1     skrll #endif
   1560  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1561  1.1     skrll 	}
   1562  1.1     skrll     }
   1563  1.1     skrll 
   1564  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1565  1.1     skrll }
   1566  1.1     skrll 
   1567  1.1     skrll /* Return the section that should be marked against garbage collection
   1568  1.1     skrll    for a given relocation.  */
   1569  1.1     skrll 
   1570  1.1     skrll static asection *
   1571  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_gc_mark_hook (asection *sec,
   1572  1.1     skrll 			 struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1573  1.1     skrll 			 Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
   1574  1.1     skrll 			 struct elf_link_hash_entry *hh,
   1575  1.1     skrll 			 Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   1576  1.1     skrll {
   1577  1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL)
   1578  1.1     skrll     switch ((unsigned int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   1579  1.1     skrll       {
   1580  1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1581  1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1582  1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
   1583  1.1     skrll       }
   1584  1.1     skrll 
   1585  1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_gc_mark_hook (sec, info, rela, hh, sym);
   1586  1.1     skrll }
   1587  1.1     skrll 
   1588  1.1     skrll /* Update the got and plt entry reference counts for the section being
   1589  1.1     skrll    removed.  */
   1590  1.1     skrll 
   1591  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1592  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_gc_sweep_hook (bfd *abfd,
   1593  1.1     skrll 			  struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   1594  1.1     skrll 			  asection *sec,
   1595  1.1     skrll 			  const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
   1596  1.1     skrll {
   1597  1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1598  1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   1599  1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1600  1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma *local_plt_refcounts;
   1601  1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela, *relend;
   1602  1.3  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1603  1.1     skrll 
   1604  1.1     skrll   if (info->relocatable)
   1605  1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1606  1.1     skrll 
   1607  1.3  christos   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1608  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1609  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1610  1.3  christos 
   1611  1.1     skrll   elf_section_data (sec)->local_dynrel = NULL;
   1612  1.1     skrll 
   1613  1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1614  1.1     skrll   eh_syms = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
   1615  1.1     skrll   local_got_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
   1616  1.1     skrll   local_plt_refcounts = local_got_refcounts;
   1617  1.1     skrll   if (local_plt_refcounts != NULL)
   1618  1.1     skrll     local_plt_refcounts += symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1619  1.1     skrll 
   1620  1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
   1621  1.1     skrll   for (rela = relocs; rela < relend; rela++)
   1622  1.1     skrll     {
   1623  1.1     skrll       unsigned long r_symndx;
   1624  1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   1625  1.1     skrll       struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh = NULL;
   1626  1.1     skrll 
   1627  1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   1628  1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx >= symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   1629  1.1     skrll 	{
   1630  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1631  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry **hdh_pp;
   1632  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   1633  1.1     skrll 
   1634  1.1     skrll 	  eh = eh_syms[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info];
   1635  1.1     skrll 	  while (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1636  1.1     skrll 		 || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1637  1.1     skrll 	    eh = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) eh->root.u.i.link;
   1638  1.1     skrll 	  hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1639  1.1     skrll 
   1640  1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_pp = &hh->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; hdh_pp = &hdh_p->hdh_next)
   1641  1.1     skrll 	    if (hdh_p->sec == sec)
   1642  1.1     skrll 	      {
   1643  1.1     skrll 		/* Everything must go for SEC.  */
   1644  1.1     skrll 		*hdh_pp = hdh_p->hdh_next;
   1645  1.1     skrll 		break;
   1646  1.1     skrll 	      }
   1647  1.1     skrll 	}
   1648  1.1     skrll 
   1649  1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   1650  1.1     skrll       r_type = elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (info, r_type, eh != NULL);
   1651  1.1     skrll 
   1652  1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   1653  1.1     skrll 	{
   1654  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   1655  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   1656  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   1657  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1658  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1659  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1660  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1661  1.1     skrll 	  if (eh != NULL)
   1662  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1663  1.1     skrll 	      if (eh->got.refcount > 0)
   1664  1.1     skrll 		eh->got.refcount -= 1;
   1665  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1666  1.1     skrll 	  else if (local_got_refcounts != NULL)
   1667  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1668  1.1     skrll 	      if (local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] > 0)
   1669  1.1     skrll 		local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] -= 1;
   1670  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1671  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1672  1.1     skrll 
   1673  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1674  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1675  1.3  christos 	  htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount -= 1;
   1676  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1677  1.1     skrll 
   1678  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   1679  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   1680  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   1681  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   1682  1.1     skrll 	  if (eh != NULL)
   1683  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1684  1.1     skrll 	      if (eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1685  1.1     skrll 		eh->plt.refcount -= 1;
   1686  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1687  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1688  1.1     skrll 
   1689  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   1690  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   1691  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   1692  1.1     skrll 	  if (eh != NULL)
   1693  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1694  1.1     skrll 	      if (eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1695  1.1     skrll 		eh->plt.refcount -= 1;
   1696  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1697  1.1     skrll 	  else if (local_plt_refcounts != NULL)
   1698  1.1     skrll 	    {
   1699  1.1     skrll 	      if (local_plt_refcounts[r_symndx] > 0)
   1700  1.1     skrll 		local_plt_refcounts[r_symndx] -= 1;
   1701  1.1     skrll 	    }
   1702  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1703  1.1     skrll 
   1704  1.1     skrll 	default:
   1705  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1706  1.1     skrll 	}
   1707  1.1     skrll     }
   1708  1.1     skrll 
   1709  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1710  1.1     skrll }
   1711  1.1     skrll 
   1712  1.1     skrll /* Support for core dump NOTE sections.  */
   1713  1.1     skrll 
   1714  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1715  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_grok_prstatus (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   1716  1.1     skrll {
   1717  1.1     skrll   int offset;
   1718  1.1     skrll   size_t size;
   1719  1.1     skrll 
   1720  1.1     skrll   switch (note->descsz)
   1721  1.1     skrll     {
   1722  1.1     skrll       default:
   1723  1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   1724  1.1     skrll 
   1725  1.1     skrll       case 396:		/* Linux/hppa */
   1726  1.1     skrll 	/* pr_cursig */
   1727  1.1     skrll 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core_signal = bfd_get_16 (abfd, note->descdata + 12);
   1728  1.1     skrll 
   1729  1.1     skrll 	/* pr_pid */
   1730  1.3  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core_lwpid = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 24);
   1731  1.1     skrll 
   1732  1.1     skrll 	/* pr_reg */
   1733  1.1     skrll 	offset = 72;
   1734  1.1     skrll 	size = 320;
   1735  1.1     skrll 
   1736  1.1     skrll 	break;
   1737  1.1     skrll     }
   1738  1.1     skrll 
   1739  1.1     skrll   /* Make a ".reg/999" section.  */
   1740  1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elfcore_make_pseudosection (abfd, ".reg",
   1741  1.1     skrll 					  size, note->descpos + offset);
   1742  1.1     skrll }
   1743  1.1     skrll 
   1744  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1745  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_grok_psinfo (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   1746  1.1     skrll {
   1747  1.1     skrll   switch (note->descsz)
   1748  1.1     skrll     {
   1749  1.1     skrll       default:
   1750  1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   1751  1.1     skrll 
   1752  1.1     skrll       case 124:		/* Linux/hppa elf_prpsinfo.  */
   1753  1.1     skrll 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core_program
   1754  1.1     skrll 	  = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 28, 16);
   1755  1.1     skrll 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core_command
   1756  1.1     skrll 	  = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 44, 80);
   1757  1.1     skrll     }
   1758  1.1     skrll 
   1759  1.1     skrll   /* Note that for some reason, a spurious space is tacked
   1760  1.1     skrll      onto the end of the args in some (at least one anyway)
   1761  1.1     skrll      implementations, so strip it off if it exists.  */
   1762  1.1     skrll   {
   1763  1.1     skrll     char *command = elf_tdata (abfd)->core_command;
   1764  1.1     skrll     int n = strlen (command);
   1765  1.1     skrll 
   1766  1.1     skrll     if (0 < n && command[n - 1] == ' ')
   1767  1.1     skrll       command[n - 1] = '\0';
   1768  1.1     skrll   }
   1769  1.1     skrll 
   1770  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1771  1.1     skrll }
   1772  1.1     skrll 
   1773  1.1     skrll /* Our own version of hide_symbol, so that we can keep plt entries for
   1774  1.1     skrll    plabels.  */
   1775  1.1     skrll 
   1776  1.1     skrll static void
   1777  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_hide_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1778  1.1     skrll 			struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   1779  1.1     skrll 			bfd_boolean force_local)
   1780  1.1     skrll {
   1781  1.1     skrll   if (force_local)
   1782  1.1     skrll     {
   1783  1.1     skrll       eh->forced_local = 1;
   1784  1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   1785  1.1     skrll 	{
   1786  1.1     skrll 	  eh->dynindx = -1;
   1787  1.1     skrll 	  _bfd_elf_strtab_delref (elf_hash_table (info)->dynstr,
   1788  1.1     skrll 				  eh->dynstr_index);
   1789  1.1     skrll 	}
   1790  1.1     skrll     }
   1791  1.1     skrll 
   1792  1.1     skrll   if (! hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel)
   1793  1.1     skrll     {
   1794  1.1     skrll       eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1795  1.1     skrll       eh->plt = elf_hash_table (info)->init_plt_refcount;
   1796  1.1     skrll     }
   1797  1.1     skrll }
   1798  1.1     skrll 
   1799  1.1     skrll /* Adjust a symbol defined by a dynamic object and referenced by a
   1800  1.1     skrll    regular object.  The current definition is in some section of the
   1801  1.1     skrll    dynamic object, but we're not including those sections.  We have to
   1802  1.1     skrll    change the definition to something the rest of the link can
   1803  1.1     skrll    understand.  */
   1804  1.1     skrll 
   1805  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1806  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_adjust_dynamic_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1807  1.1     skrll 				  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1808  1.1     skrll {
   1809  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1810  1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   1811  1.1     skrll 
   1812  1.1     skrll   /* If this is a function, put it in the procedure linkage table.  We
   1813  1.1     skrll      will fill in the contents of the procedure linkage table later.  */
   1814  1.1     skrll   if (eh->type == STT_FUNC
   1815  1.1     skrll       || eh->needs_plt)
   1816  1.1     skrll     {
   1817  1.1     skrll       if (eh->plt.refcount <= 0
   1818  1.1     skrll 	  || (eh->def_regular
   1819  1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1820  1.1     skrll 	      && ! hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel
   1821  1.1     skrll 	      && (!info->shared || info->symbolic)))
   1822  1.1     skrll 	{
   1823  1.1     skrll 	  /* The .plt entry is not needed when:
   1824  1.1     skrll 	     a) Garbage collection has removed all references to the
   1825  1.1     skrll 	     symbol, or
   1826  1.1     skrll 	     b) We know for certain the symbol is defined in this
   1827  1.1     skrll 	     object, and it's not a weak definition, nor is the symbol
   1828  1.1     skrll 	     used by a plabel relocation.  Either this object is the
   1829  1.1     skrll 	     application or we are doing a shared symbolic link.  */
   1830  1.1     skrll 
   1831  1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1832  1.1     skrll 	  eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1833  1.1     skrll 	}
   1834  1.1     skrll 
   1835  1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1836  1.1     skrll     }
   1837  1.1     skrll   else
   1838  1.1     skrll     eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1839  1.1     skrll 
   1840  1.1     skrll   /* If this is a weak symbol, and there is a real definition, the
   1841  1.1     skrll      processor independent code will have arranged for us to see the
   1842  1.1     skrll      real definition first, and we can just use the same value.  */
   1843  1.1     skrll   if (eh->u.weakdef != NULL)
   1844  1.1     skrll     {
   1845  1.1     skrll       if (eh->u.weakdef->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
   1846  1.1     skrll 	  && eh->u.weakdef->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   1847  1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   1848  1.1     skrll       eh->root.u.def.section = eh->u.weakdef->root.u.def.section;
   1849  1.1     skrll       eh->root.u.def.value = eh->u.weakdef->root.u.def.value;
   1850  1.1     skrll       if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   1851  1.1     skrll 	eh->non_got_ref = eh->u.weakdef->non_got_ref;
   1852  1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1853  1.1     skrll     }
   1854  1.1     skrll 
   1855  1.1     skrll   /* This is a reference to a symbol defined by a dynamic object which
   1856  1.1     skrll      is not a function.  */
   1857  1.1     skrll 
   1858  1.1     skrll   /* If we are creating a shared library, we must presume that the
   1859  1.1     skrll      only references to the symbol are via the global offset table.
   1860  1.1     skrll      For such cases we need not do anything here; the relocations will
   1861  1.1     skrll      be handled correctly by relocate_section.  */
   1862  1.1     skrll   if (info->shared)
   1863  1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1864  1.1     skrll 
   1865  1.1     skrll   /* If there are no references to this symbol that do not use the
   1866  1.1     skrll      GOT, we don't need to generate a copy reloc.  */
   1867  1.1     skrll   if (!eh->non_got_ref)
   1868  1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1869  1.1     skrll 
   1870  1.1     skrll   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   1871  1.1     skrll     {
   1872  1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1873  1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   1874  1.1     skrll 
   1875  1.1     skrll       hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1876  1.1     skrll       for (hdh_p = hh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->hdh_next)
   1877  1.1     skrll 	{
   1878  1.1     skrll 	  sec = hdh_p->sec->output_section;
   1879  1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL && (sec->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1880  1.1     skrll 	    break;
   1881  1.1     skrll 	}
   1882  1.1     skrll 
   1883  1.1     skrll       /* If we didn't find any dynamic relocs in read-only sections, then
   1884  1.1     skrll 	 we'll be keeping the dynamic relocs and avoiding the copy reloc.  */
   1885  1.1     skrll       if (hdh_p == NULL)
   1886  1.1     skrll 	{
   1887  1.1     skrll 	  eh->non_got_ref = 0;
   1888  1.1     skrll 	  return TRUE;
   1889  1.1     skrll 	}
   1890  1.1     skrll     }
   1891  1.1     skrll 
   1892  1.1     skrll   if (eh->size == 0)
   1893  1.1     skrll     {
   1894  1.1     skrll       (*_bfd_error_handler) (_("dynamic variable `%s' is zero size"),
   1895  1.1     skrll 			     eh->root.root.string);
   1896  1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1897  1.1     skrll     }
   1898  1.1     skrll 
   1899  1.1     skrll   /* We must allocate the symbol in our .dynbss section, which will
   1900  1.1     skrll      become part of the .bss section of the executable.  There will be
   1901  1.1     skrll      an entry for this symbol in the .dynsym section.  The dynamic
   1902  1.1     skrll      object will contain position independent code, so all references
   1903  1.1     skrll      from the dynamic object to this symbol will go through the global
   1904  1.1     skrll      offset table.  The dynamic linker will use the .dynsym entry to
   1905  1.1     skrll      determine the address it must put in the global offset table, so
   1906  1.1     skrll      both the dynamic object and the regular object will refer to the
   1907  1.1     skrll      same memory location for the variable.  */
   1908  1.1     skrll 
   1909  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1910  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1911  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1912  1.1     skrll 
   1913  1.1     skrll   /* We must generate a COPY reloc to tell the dynamic linker to
   1914  1.1     skrll      copy the initial value out of the dynamic object and into the
   1915  1.1     skrll      runtime process image.  */
   1916  1.1     skrll   if ((eh->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
   1917  1.1     skrll     {
   1918  1.1     skrll       htab->srelbss->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1919  1.1     skrll       eh->needs_copy = 1;
   1920  1.1     skrll     }
   1921  1.1     skrll 
   1922  1.1     skrll   sec = htab->sdynbss;
   1923  1.1     skrll 
   1924  1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_adjust_dynamic_copy (eh, sec);
   1925  1.1     skrll }
   1926  1.1     skrll 
   1927  1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in the .plt for entries that won't have relocations.
   1928  1.1     skrll    ie. plabel entries.  */
   1929  1.1     skrll 
   1930  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1931  1.1     skrll allocate_plt_static (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   1932  1.1     skrll {
   1933  1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1934  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1935  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1936  1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   1937  1.1     skrll 
   1938  1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1939  1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1940  1.1     skrll 
   1941  1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1942  1.1     skrll     eh = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) eh->root.u.i.link;
   1943  1.1     skrll 
   1944  1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   1945  1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1946  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1947  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1948  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1949  1.3  christos 
   1950  1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1951  1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1952  1.1     skrll     {
   1953  1.1     skrll       /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   1954  1.1     skrll 	 Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   1955  1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx == -1
   1956  1.1     skrll 	  && !eh->forced_local
   1957  1.1     skrll 	  && eh->type != STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   1958  1.1     skrll 	{
   1959  1.1     skrll 	  if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh))
   1960  1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1961  1.1     skrll 	}
   1962  1.1     skrll 
   1963  1.1     skrll       if (WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, info->shared, eh))
   1964  1.1     skrll 	{
   1965  1.1     skrll 	  /* Allocate these later.  From this point on, h->plabel
   1966  1.1     skrll 	     means that the plt entry is only used by a plabel.
   1967  1.1     skrll 	     We'll be using a normal plt entry for this symbol, so
   1968  1.1     skrll 	     clear the plabel indicator.  */
   1969  1.1     skrll 
   1970  1.1     skrll 	  hh->plabel = 0;
   1971  1.1     skrll 	}
   1972  1.1     skrll       else if (hh->plabel)
   1973  1.1     skrll 	{
   1974  1.1     skrll 	  /* Make an entry in the .plt section for plabel references
   1975  1.1     skrll 	     that won't have a .plt entry for other reasons.  */
   1976  1.1     skrll 	  sec = htab->splt;
   1977  1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = sec->size;
   1978  1.1     skrll 	  sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1979  1.1     skrll 	}
   1980  1.1     skrll       else
   1981  1.1     skrll 	{
   1982  1.1     skrll 	  /* No .plt entry needed.  */
   1983  1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1984  1.1     skrll 	  eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1985  1.1     skrll 	}
   1986  1.1     skrll     }
   1987  1.1     skrll   else
   1988  1.1     skrll     {
   1989  1.1     skrll       eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1990  1.1     skrll       eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1991  1.1     skrll     }
   1992  1.1     skrll 
   1993  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1994  1.1     skrll }
   1995  1.1     skrll 
   1996  1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in .plt, .got and associated reloc sections for
   1997  1.1     skrll    global syms.  */
   1998  1.1     skrll 
   1999  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2000  1.1     skrll allocate_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   2001  1.1     skrll {
   2002  1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   2003  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   2004  1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   2005  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2006  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   2007  1.1     skrll 
   2008  1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   2009  1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   2010  1.1     skrll 
   2011  1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2012  1.1     skrll     eh = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) eh->root.u.i.link;
   2013  1.1     skrll 
   2014  1.1     skrll   info = inf;
   2015  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2016  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2017  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   2018  1.3  christos 
   2019  1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   2020  1.1     skrll 
   2021  1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   2022  1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   2023  1.1     skrll       && !hh->plabel
   2024  1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   2025  1.1     skrll     {
   2026  1.1     skrll       /* Make an entry in the .plt section.  */
   2027  1.1     skrll       sec = htab->splt;
   2028  1.1     skrll       eh->plt.offset = sec->size;
   2029  1.1     skrll       sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2030  1.1     skrll 
   2031  1.1     skrll       /* We also need to make an entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   2032  1.1     skrll       htab->srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2033  1.1     skrll       htab->need_plt_stub = 1;
   2034  1.1     skrll     }
   2035  1.1     skrll 
   2036  1.1     skrll   if (eh->got.refcount > 0)
   2037  1.1     skrll     {
   2038  1.1     skrll       /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   2039  1.1     skrll 	 Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   2040  1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx == -1
   2041  1.1     skrll 	  && !eh->forced_local
   2042  1.1     skrll 	  && eh->type != STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   2043  1.1     skrll 	{
   2044  1.1     skrll 	  if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh))
   2045  1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2046  1.1     skrll 	}
   2047  1.1     skrll 
   2048  1.1     skrll       sec = htab->sgot;
   2049  1.1     skrll       eh->got.offset = sec->size;
   2050  1.1     skrll       sec->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2051  1.1     skrll       /* R_PARISC_TLS_GD* needs two GOT entries */
   2052  1.1     skrll       if ((hh->tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE)) == (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE))
   2053  1.1     skrll       	sec->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE * 2;
   2054  1.1     skrll       else if ((hh->tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) == GOT_TLS_GD)
   2055  1.1     skrll       	sec->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2056  1.1     skrll       if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   2057  1.1     skrll 	  && (info->shared
   2058  1.1     skrll 	      || (eh->dynindx != -1
   2059  1.1     skrll 		  && !eh->forced_local)))
   2060  1.1     skrll 	{
   2061  1.1     skrll 	  htab->srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2062  1.1     skrll 	  if ((hh->tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE)) == (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE))
   2063  1.1     skrll 	    htab->srelgot->size += 2 * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2064  1.1     skrll 	  else if ((hh->tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) == GOT_TLS_GD)
   2065  1.1     skrll 	    htab->srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2066  1.1     skrll 	}
   2067  1.1     skrll     }
   2068  1.1     skrll   else
   2069  1.1     skrll     eh->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2070  1.1     skrll 
   2071  1.1     skrll   if (hh->dyn_relocs == NULL)
   2072  1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   2073  1.1     skrll 
   2074  1.1     skrll   /* If this is a -Bsymbolic shared link, then we need to discard all
   2075  1.1     skrll      space allocated for dynamic pc-relative relocs against symbols
   2076  1.1     skrll      defined in a regular object.  For the normal shared case, discard
   2077  1.1     skrll      space for relocs that have become local due to symbol visibility
   2078  1.1     skrll      changes.  */
   2079  1.1     skrll   if (info->shared)
   2080  1.1     skrll     {
   2081  1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   2082  1.1     skrll       if (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, eh))
   2083  1.1     skrll 	{
   2084  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry **hdh_pp;
   2085  1.1     skrll 
   2086  1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_pp = &hh->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; )
   2087  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2088  1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p->count -= hdh_p->relative_count;
   2089  1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p->relative_count = 0;
   2090  1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_p->count == 0)
   2091  1.1     skrll 		*hdh_pp = hdh_p->hdh_next;
   2092  1.1     skrll 	      else
   2093  1.1     skrll 		hdh_pp = &hdh_p->hdh_next;
   2094  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2095  1.1     skrll 	}
   2096  1.1     skrll #endif
   2097  1.1     skrll 
   2098  1.1     skrll       /* Also discard relocs on undefined weak syms with non-default
   2099  1.1     skrll 	 visibility.  */
   2100  1.1     skrll       if (hh->dyn_relocs != NULL
   2101  1.1     skrll 	  && eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   2102  1.1     skrll 	{
   2103  1.1     skrll 	  if (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
   2104  1.1     skrll 	    hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   2105  1.1     skrll 
   2106  1.1     skrll 	  /* Make sure undefined weak symbols are output as a dynamic
   2107  1.1     skrll 	     symbol in PIEs.  */
   2108  1.1     skrll 	  else if (eh->dynindx == -1
   2109  1.1     skrll 		   && !eh->forced_local)
   2110  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2111  1.1     skrll 	      if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh))
   2112  1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   2113  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2114  1.1     skrll 	}
   2115  1.1     skrll     }
   2116  1.1     skrll   else
   2117  1.1     skrll     {
   2118  1.1     skrll       /* For the non-shared case, discard space for relocs against
   2119  1.1     skrll 	 symbols which turn out to need copy relocs or are not
   2120  1.1     skrll 	 dynamic.  */
   2121  1.1     skrll 
   2122  1.1     skrll       if (!eh->non_got_ref
   2123  1.1     skrll 	  && ((ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   2124  1.1     skrll 	       && eh->def_dynamic
   2125  1.1     skrll 	       && !eh->def_regular)
   2126  1.1     skrll 	       || (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   2127  1.1     skrll 		   && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   2128  1.1     skrll 		       || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined))))
   2129  1.1     skrll 	{
   2130  1.1     skrll 	  /* Make sure this symbol is output as a dynamic symbol.
   2131  1.1     skrll 	     Undefined weak syms won't yet be marked as dynamic.  */
   2132  1.1     skrll 	  if (eh->dynindx == -1
   2133  1.1     skrll 	      && !eh->forced_local
   2134  1.1     skrll 	      && eh->type != STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   2135  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2136  1.1     skrll 	      if (! bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh))
   2137  1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   2138  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2139  1.1     skrll 
   2140  1.1     skrll 	  /* If that succeeded, we know we'll be keeping all the
   2141  1.1     skrll 	     relocs.  */
   2142  1.1     skrll 	  if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   2143  1.1     skrll 	    goto keep;
   2144  1.1     skrll 	}
   2145  1.1     skrll 
   2146  1.1     skrll       hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   2147  1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   2148  1.1     skrll 
   2149  1.1     skrll     keep: ;
   2150  1.1     skrll     }
   2151  1.1     skrll 
   2152  1.1     skrll   /* Finally, allocate space.  */
   2153  1.1     skrll   for (hdh_p = hh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->hdh_next)
   2154  1.1     skrll     {
   2155  1.1     skrll       asection *sreloc = elf_section_data (hdh_p->sec)->sreloc;
   2156  1.1     skrll       sreloc->size += hdh_p->count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2157  1.1     skrll     }
   2158  1.1     skrll 
   2159  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2160  1.1     skrll }
   2161  1.1     skrll 
   2162  1.1     skrll /* This function is called via elf_link_hash_traverse to force
   2163  1.1     skrll    millicode symbols local so they do not end up as globals in the
   2164  1.1     skrll    dynamic symbol table.  We ought to be able to do this in
   2165  1.1     skrll    adjust_dynamic_symbol, but our adjust_dynamic_symbol is not called
   2166  1.1     skrll    for all dynamic symbols.  Arguably, this is a bug in
   2167  1.1     skrll    elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   2168  1.1     skrll 
   2169  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2170  1.1     skrll clobber_millicode_symbols (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   2171  1.1     skrll 			   struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2172  1.1     skrll {
   2173  1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2174  1.1     skrll     eh = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) eh->root.u.i.link;
   2175  1.1     skrll 
   2176  1.1     skrll   if (eh->type == STT_PARISC_MILLI
   2177  1.1     skrll       && !eh->forced_local)
   2178  1.1     skrll     {
   2179  1.1     skrll       elf32_hppa_hide_symbol (info, eh, TRUE);
   2180  1.1     skrll     }
   2181  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2182  1.1     skrll }
   2183  1.1     skrll 
   2184  1.1     skrll /* Find any dynamic relocs that apply to read-only sections.  */
   2185  1.1     skrll 
   2186  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2187  1.1     skrll readonly_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   2188  1.1     skrll {
   2189  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2190  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   2191  1.1     skrll 
   2192  1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2193  1.1     skrll     eh = (struct elf_link_hash_entry *) eh->root.u.i.link;
   2194  1.1     skrll 
   2195  1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   2196  1.1     skrll   for (hdh_p = hh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->hdh_next)
   2197  1.1     skrll     {
   2198  1.1     skrll       asection *sec = hdh_p->sec->output_section;
   2199  1.1     skrll 
   2200  1.1     skrll       if (sec != NULL && (sec->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   2201  1.1     skrll 	{
   2202  1.1     skrll 	  struct bfd_link_info *info = inf;
   2203  1.1     skrll 
   2204  1.2     skrll           if (info->warn_shared_textrel)
   2205  1.2     skrll             (*_bfd_error_handler)
   2206  1.2     skrll               (_("warning: dynamic relocation in readonly section `%s'"),
   2207  1.2     skrll               eh->root.root.string);
   2208  1.1     skrll 	  info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2209  1.1     skrll 
   2210  1.1     skrll 	  /* Not an error, just cut short the traversal.  */
   2211  1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
   2212  1.1     skrll 	}
   2213  1.1     skrll     }
   2214  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2215  1.1     skrll }
   2216  1.1     skrll 
   2217  1.1     skrll /* Set the sizes of the dynamic sections.  */
   2218  1.1     skrll 
   2219  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2220  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_size_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   2221  1.1     skrll 				  struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2222  1.1     skrll {
   2223  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   2224  1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   2225  1.1     skrll   bfd *ibfd;
   2226  1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   2227  1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean relocs;
   2228  1.1     skrll 
   2229  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2230  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2231  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   2232  1.3  christos 
   2233  1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->etab.dynobj;
   2234  1.1     skrll   if (dynobj == NULL)
   2235  1.1     skrll     abort ();
   2236  1.1     skrll 
   2237  1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2238  1.1     skrll     {
   2239  1.1     skrll       /* Set the contents of the .interp section to the interpreter.  */
   2240  1.1     skrll       if (info->executable)
   2241  1.1     skrll 	{
   2242  1.1     skrll 	  sec = bfd_get_section_by_name (dynobj, ".interp");
   2243  1.1     skrll 	  if (sec == NULL)
   2244  1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2245  1.1     skrll 	  sec->size = sizeof ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2246  1.1     skrll 	  sec->contents = (unsigned char *) ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2247  1.1     skrll 	}
   2248  1.1     skrll 
   2249  1.1     skrll       /* Force millicode symbols local.  */
   2250  1.1     skrll       elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab,
   2251  1.1     skrll 			      clobber_millicode_symbols,
   2252  1.1     skrll 			      info);
   2253  1.1     skrll     }
   2254  1.1     skrll 
   2255  1.1     skrll   /* Set up .got and .plt offsets for local syms, and space for local
   2256  1.1     skrll      dynamic relocs.  */
   2257  1.1     skrll   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link_next)
   2258  1.1     skrll     {
   2259  1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_got;
   2260  1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_got;
   2261  1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_plt;
   2262  1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_plt;
   2263  1.1     skrll       bfd_size_type locsymcount;
   2264  1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2265  1.1     skrll       asection *srel;
   2266  1.1     skrll       char *local_tls_type;
   2267  1.1     skrll 
   2268  1.1     skrll       if (bfd_get_flavour (ibfd) != bfd_target_elf_flavour)
   2269  1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2270  1.1     skrll 
   2271  1.1     skrll       for (sec = ibfd->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
   2272  1.1     skrll 	{
   2273  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *hdh_p;
   2274  1.1     skrll 
   2275  1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_p = ((struct elf32_hppa_dyn_reloc_entry *)
   2276  1.1     skrll 		    elf_section_data (sec)->local_dynrel);
   2277  1.1     skrll 	       hdh_p != NULL;
   2278  1.1     skrll 	       hdh_p = hdh_p->hdh_next)
   2279  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2280  1.1     skrll 	      if (!bfd_is_abs_section (hdh_p->sec)
   2281  1.1     skrll 		  && bfd_is_abs_section (hdh_p->sec->output_section))
   2282  1.1     skrll 		{
   2283  1.1     skrll 		  /* Input section has been discarded, either because
   2284  1.1     skrll 		     it is a copy of a linkonce section or due to
   2285  1.1     skrll 		     linker script /DISCARD/, so we'll be discarding
   2286  1.1     skrll 		     the relocs too.  */
   2287  1.1     skrll 		}
   2288  1.1     skrll 	      else if (hdh_p->count != 0)
   2289  1.1     skrll 		{
   2290  1.1     skrll 		  srel = elf_section_data (hdh_p->sec)->sreloc;
   2291  1.1     skrll 		  srel->size += hdh_p->count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2292  1.1     skrll 		  if ((hdh_p->sec->output_section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   2293  1.1     skrll 		    info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2294  1.1     skrll 		}
   2295  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2296  1.1     skrll 	}
   2297  1.1     skrll 
   2298  1.1     skrll       local_got = elf_local_got_refcounts (ibfd);
   2299  1.1     skrll       if (!local_got)
   2300  1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2301  1.1     skrll 
   2302  1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (ibfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2303  1.1     skrll       locsymcount = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   2304  1.1     skrll       end_local_got = local_got + locsymcount;
   2305  1.1     skrll       local_tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (ibfd);
   2306  1.1     skrll       sec = htab->sgot;
   2307  1.1     skrll       srel = htab->srelgot;
   2308  1.1     skrll       for (; local_got < end_local_got; ++local_got)
   2309  1.1     skrll 	{
   2310  1.1     skrll 	  if (*local_got > 0)
   2311  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2312  1.1     skrll 	      *local_got = sec->size;
   2313  1.1     skrll 	      sec->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2314  1.1     skrll 	      if ((*local_tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE)) == (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE))
   2315  1.1     skrll 		sec->size += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2316  1.1     skrll 	      else if ((*local_tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) == GOT_TLS_GD)
   2317  1.1     skrll 		sec->size += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2318  1.1     skrll 	      if (info->shared)
   2319  1.1     skrll 	        {
   2320  1.1     skrll 		  srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2321  1.1     skrll 		  if ((*local_tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE)) == (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_IE))
   2322  1.1     skrll 		    srel->size += 2 * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2323  1.1     skrll 		  else if ((*local_tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) == GOT_TLS_GD)
   2324  1.1     skrll 		    srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2325  1.1     skrll 	        }
   2326  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2327  1.1     skrll 	  else
   2328  1.1     skrll 	    *local_got = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2329  1.1     skrll 
   2330  1.1     skrll 	  ++local_tls_type;
   2331  1.1     skrll 	}
   2332  1.1     skrll 
   2333  1.1     skrll       local_plt = end_local_got;
   2334  1.1     skrll       end_local_plt = local_plt + locsymcount;
   2335  1.1     skrll       if (! htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2336  1.1     skrll 	{
   2337  1.1     skrll 	  /* Won't be used, but be safe.  */
   2338  1.1     skrll 	  for (; local_plt < end_local_plt; ++local_plt)
   2339  1.1     skrll 	    *local_plt = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2340  1.1     skrll 	}
   2341  1.1     skrll       else
   2342  1.1     skrll 	{
   2343  1.1     skrll 	  sec = htab->splt;
   2344  1.1     skrll 	  srel = htab->srelplt;
   2345  1.1     skrll 	  for (; local_plt < end_local_plt; ++local_plt)
   2346  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2347  1.1     skrll 	      if (*local_plt > 0)
   2348  1.1     skrll 		{
   2349  1.1     skrll 		  *local_plt = sec->size;
   2350  1.1     skrll 		  sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2351  1.1     skrll 		  if (info->shared)
   2352  1.1     skrll 		    srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2353  1.1     skrll 		}
   2354  1.1     skrll 	      else
   2355  1.1     skrll 		*local_plt = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2356  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2357  1.1     skrll 	}
   2358  1.1     skrll     }
   2359  1.1     skrll 
   2360  1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0)
   2361  1.1     skrll     {
   2362  1.1     skrll       /* Allocate 2 got entries and 1 dynamic reloc for
   2363  1.1     skrll          R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32 relocs.  */
   2364  1.1     skrll       htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = htab->sgot->size;
   2365  1.1     skrll       htab->sgot->size += (GOT_ENTRY_SIZE * 2);
   2366  1.1     skrll       htab->srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2367  1.1     skrll     }
   2368  1.1     skrll   else
   2369  1.1     skrll     htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = -1;
   2370  1.1     skrll 
   2371  1.1     skrll   /* Do all the .plt entries without relocs first.  The dynamic linker
   2372  1.1     skrll      uses the last .plt reloc to find the end of the .plt (and hence
   2373  1.1     skrll      the start of the .got) for lazy linking.  */
   2374  1.1     skrll   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, allocate_plt_static, info);
   2375  1.1     skrll 
   2376  1.1     skrll   /* Allocate global sym .plt and .got entries, and space for global
   2377  1.1     skrll      sym dynamic relocs.  */
   2378  1.1     skrll   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, allocate_dynrelocs, info);
   2379  1.1     skrll 
   2380  1.1     skrll   /* The check_relocs and adjust_dynamic_symbol entry points have
   2381  1.1     skrll      determined the sizes of the various dynamic sections.  Allocate
   2382  1.1     skrll      memory for them.  */
   2383  1.1     skrll   relocs = FALSE;
   2384  1.1     skrll   for (sec = dynobj->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
   2385  1.1     skrll     {
   2386  1.1     skrll       if ((sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   2387  1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2388  1.1     skrll 
   2389  1.1     skrll       if (sec == htab->splt)
   2390  1.1     skrll 	{
   2391  1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->need_plt_stub)
   2392  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2393  1.1     skrll 	      /* Make space for the plt stub at the end of the .plt
   2394  1.1     skrll 		 section.  We want this stub right at the end, up
   2395  1.1     skrll 		 against the .got section.  */
   2396  1.1     skrll 	      int gotalign = bfd_section_alignment (dynobj, htab->sgot);
   2397  1.1     skrll 	      int pltalign = bfd_section_alignment (dynobj, sec);
   2398  1.1     skrll 	      bfd_size_type mask;
   2399  1.1     skrll 
   2400  1.1     skrll 	      if (gotalign > pltalign)
   2401  1.1     skrll 		bfd_set_section_alignment (dynobj, sec, gotalign);
   2402  1.1     skrll 	      mask = ((bfd_size_type) 1 << gotalign) - 1;
   2403  1.1     skrll 	      sec->size = (sec->size + sizeof (plt_stub) + mask) & ~mask;
   2404  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2405  1.1     skrll 	}
   2406  1.1     skrll       else if (sec == htab->sgot
   2407  1.1     skrll 	       || sec == htab->sdynbss)
   2408  1.1     skrll 	;
   2409  1.1     skrll       else if (CONST_STRNEQ (bfd_get_section_name (dynobj, sec), ".rela"))
   2410  1.1     skrll 	{
   2411  1.1     skrll 	  if (sec->size != 0)
   2412  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2413  1.1     skrll 	      /* Remember whether there are any reloc sections other
   2414  1.1     skrll 		 than .rela.plt.  */
   2415  1.1     skrll 	      if (sec != htab->srelplt)
   2416  1.1     skrll 		relocs = TRUE;
   2417  1.1     skrll 
   2418  1.1     skrll 	      /* We use the reloc_count field as a counter if we need
   2419  1.1     skrll 		 to copy relocs into the output file.  */
   2420  1.1     skrll 	      sec->reloc_count = 0;
   2421  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2422  1.1     skrll 	}
   2423  1.1     skrll       else
   2424  1.1     skrll 	{
   2425  1.1     skrll 	  /* It's not one of our sections, so don't allocate space.  */
   2426  1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2427  1.1     skrll 	}
   2428  1.1     skrll 
   2429  1.1     skrll       if (sec->size == 0)
   2430  1.1     skrll 	{
   2431  1.1     skrll 	  /* If we don't need this section, strip it from the
   2432  1.1     skrll 	     output file.  This is mostly to handle .rela.bss and
   2433  1.1     skrll 	     .rela.plt.  We must create both sections in
   2434  1.1     skrll 	     create_dynamic_sections, because they must be created
   2435  1.1     skrll 	     before the linker maps input sections to output
   2436  1.1     skrll 	     sections.  The linker does that before
   2437  1.1     skrll 	     adjust_dynamic_symbol is called, and it is that
   2438  1.1     skrll 	     function which decides whether anything needs to go
   2439  1.1     skrll 	     into these sections.  */
   2440  1.1     skrll 	  sec->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
   2441  1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2442  1.1     skrll 	}
   2443  1.1     skrll 
   2444  1.1     skrll       if ((sec->flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) == 0)
   2445  1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2446  1.1     skrll 
   2447  1.1     skrll       /* Allocate memory for the section contents.  Zero it, because
   2448  1.1     skrll 	 we may not fill in all the reloc sections.  */
   2449  1.1     skrll       sec->contents = bfd_zalloc (dynobj, sec->size);
   2450  1.1     skrll       if (sec->contents == NULL)
   2451  1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   2452  1.1     skrll     }
   2453  1.1     skrll 
   2454  1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2455  1.1     skrll     {
   2456  1.1     skrll       /* Like IA-64 and HPPA64, always create a DT_PLTGOT.  It
   2457  1.1     skrll 	 actually has nothing to do with the PLT, it is how we
   2458  1.1     skrll 	 communicate the LTP value of a load module to the dynamic
   2459  1.1     skrll 	 linker.  */
   2460  1.1     skrll #define add_dynamic_entry(TAG, VAL) \
   2461  1.1     skrll   _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_entry (info, TAG, VAL)
   2462  1.1     skrll 
   2463  1.1     skrll       if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTGOT, 0))
   2464  1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   2465  1.1     skrll 
   2466  1.1     skrll       /* Add some entries to the .dynamic section.  We fill in the
   2467  1.1     skrll 	 values later, in elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections, but we
   2468  1.1     skrll 	 must add the entries now so that we get the correct size for
   2469  1.1     skrll 	 the .dynamic section.  The DT_DEBUG entry is filled in by the
   2470  1.1     skrll 	 dynamic linker and used by the debugger.  */
   2471  1.1     skrll       if (info->executable)
   2472  1.1     skrll 	{
   2473  1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_DEBUG, 0))
   2474  1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2475  1.1     skrll 	}
   2476  1.1     skrll 
   2477  1.1     skrll       if (htab->srelplt->size != 0)
   2478  1.1     skrll 	{
   2479  1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTRELSZ, 0)
   2480  1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTREL, DT_RELA)
   2481  1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_JMPREL, 0))
   2482  1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2483  1.1     skrll 	}
   2484  1.1     skrll 
   2485  1.1     skrll       if (relocs)
   2486  1.1     skrll 	{
   2487  1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELA, 0)
   2488  1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELASZ, 0)
   2489  1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELAENT, sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela)))
   2490  1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2491  1.1     skrll 
   2492  1.1     skrll 	  /* If any dynamic relocs apply to a read-only section,
   2493  1.1     skrll 	     then we need a DT_TEXTREL entry.  */
   2494  1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) == 0)
   2495  1.1     skrll 	    elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, readonly_dynrelocs, info);
   2496  1.1     skrll 
   2497  1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) != 0)
   2498  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2499  1.1     skrll 	      if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_TEXTREL, 0))
   2500  1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   2501  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2502  1.1     skrll 	}
   2503  1.1     skrll     }
   2504  1.1     skrll #undef add_dynamic_entry
   2505  1.1     skrll 
   2506  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2507  1.1     skrll }
   2508  1.1     skrll 
   2509  1.1     skrll /* External entry points for sizing and building linker stubs.  */
   2510  1.1     skrll 
   2511  1.1     skrll /* Set up various things so that we can make a list of input sections
   2512  1.1     skrll    for each output section included in the link.  Returns -1 on error,
   2513  1.1     skrll    0 when no stubs will be needed, and 1 on success.  */
   2514  1.1     skrll 
   2515  1.1     skrll int
   2516  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_setup_section_lists (bfd *output_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2517  1.1     skrll {
   2518  1.1     skrll   bfd *input_bfd;
   2519  1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_count;
   2520  1.1     skrll   int top_id, top_index;
   2521  1.1     skrll   asection *section;
   2522  1.1     skrll   asection **input_list, **list;
   2523  1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt;
   2524  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2525  1.1     skrll 
   2526  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2527  1.3  christos     return -1;
   2528  1.3  christos 
   2529  1.1     skrll   /* Count the number of input BFDs and find the top input section id.  */
   2530  1.1     skrll   for (input_bfd = info->input_bfds, bfd_count = 0, top_id = 0;
   2531  1.1     skrll        input_bfd != NULL;
   2532  1.1     skrll        input_bfd = input_bfd->link_next)
   2533  1.1     skrll     {
   2534  1.1     skrll       bfd_count += 1;
   2535  1.1     skrll       for (section = input_bfd->sections;
   2536  1.1     skrll 	   section != NULL;
   2537  1.1     skrll 	   section = section->next)
   2538  1.1     skrll 	{
   2539  1.1     skrll 	  if (top_id < section->id)
   2540  1.1     skrll 	    top_id = section->id;
   2541  1.1     skrll 	}
   2542  1.1     skrll     }
   2543  1.1     skrll   htab->bfd_count = bfd_count;
   2544  1.1     skrll 
   2545  1.1     skrll   amt = sizeof (struct map_stub) * (top_id + 1);
   2546  1.1     skrll   htab->stub_group = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
   2547  1.1     skrll   if (htab->stub_group == NULL)
   2548  1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2549  1.1     skrll 
   2550  1.1     skrll   /* We can't use output_bfd->section_count here to find the top output
   2551  1.1     skrll      section index as some sections may have been removed, and
   2552  1.1     skrll      strip_excluded_output_sections doesn't renumber the indices.  */
   2553  1.1     skrll   for (section = output_bfd->sections, top_index = 0;
   2554  1.1     skrll        section != NULL;
   2555  1.1     skrll        section = section->next)
   2556  1.1     skrll     {
   2557  1.1     skrll       if (top_index < section->index)
   2558  1.1     skrll 	top_index = section->index;
   2559  1.1     skrll     }
   2560  1.1     skrll 
   2561  1.1     skrll   htab->top_index = top_index;
   2562  1.1     skrll   amt = sizeof (asection *) * (top_index + 1);
   2563  1.1     skrll   input_list = bfd_malloc (amt);
   2564  1.1     skrll   htab->input_list = input_list;
   2565  1.1     skrll   if (input_list == NULL)
   2566  1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2567  1.1     skrll 
   2568  1.1     skrll   /* For sections we aren't interested in, mark their entries with a
   2569  1.1     skrll      value we can check later.  */
   2570  1.1     skrll   list = input_list + top_index;
   2571  1.1     skrll   do
   2572  1.1     skrll     *list = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
   2573  1.1     skrll   while (list-- != input_list);
   2574  1.1     skrll 
   2575  1.1     skrll   for (section = output_bfd->sections;
   2576  1.1     skrll        section != NULL;
   2577  1.1     skrll        section = section->next)
   2578  1.1     skrll     {
   2579  1.1     skrll       if ((section->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   2580  1.1     skrll 	input_list[section->index] = NULL;
   2581  1.1     skrll     }
   2582  1.1     skrll 
   2583  1.1     skrll   return 1;
   2584  1.1     skrll }
   2585  1.1     skrll 
   2586  1.1     skrll /* The linker repeatedly calls this function for each input section,
   2587  1.1     skrll    in the order that input sections are linked into output sections.
   2588  1.1     skrll    Build lists of input sections to determine groupings between which
   2589  1.1     skrll    we may insert linker stubs.  */
   2590  1.1     skrll 
   2591  1.1     skrll void
   2592  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_next_input_section (struct bfd_link_info *info, asection *isec)
   2593  1.1     skrll {
   2594  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2595  1.1     skrll 
   2596  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2597  1.3  christos     return;
   2598  1.3  christos 
   2599  1.1     skrll   if (isec->output_section->index <= htab->top_index)
   2600  1.1     skrll     {
   2601  1.1     skrll       asection **list = htab->input_list + isec->output_section->index;
   2602  1.1     skrll       if (*list != bfd_abs_section_ptr)
   2603  1.1     skrll 	{
   2604  1.1     skrll 	  /* Steal the link_sec pointer for our list.  */
   2605  1.1     skrll #define PREV_SEC(sec) (htab->stub_group[(sec)->id].link_sec)
   2606  1.1     skrll 	  /* This happens to make the list in reverse order,
   2607  1.1     skrll 	     which is what we want.  */
   2608  1.1     skrll 	  PREV_SEC (isec) = *list;
   2609  1.1     skrll 	  *list = isec;
   2610  1.1     skrll 	}
   2611  1.1     skrll     }
   2612  1.1     skrll }
   2613  1.1     skrll 
   2614  1.1     skrll /* See whether we can group stub sections together.  Grouping stub
   2615  1.1     skrll    sections may result in fewer stubs.  More importantly, we need to
   2616  1.1     skrll    put all .init* and .fini* stubs at the beginning of the .init or
   2617  1.1     skrll    .fini output sections respectively, because glibc splits the
   2618  1.1     skrll    _init and _fini functions into multiple parts.  Putting a stub in
   2619  1.1     skrll    the middle of a function is not a good idea.  */
   2620  1.1     skrll 
   2621  1.1     skrll static void
   2622  1.1     skrll group_sections (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab,
   2623  1.1     skrll 		bfd_size_type stub_group_size,
   2624  1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean stubs_always_before_branch)
   2625  1.1     skrll {
   2626  1.1     skrll   asection **list = htab->input_list + htab->top_index;
   2627  1.1     skrll   do
   2628  1.1     skrll     {
   2629  1.1     skrll       asection *tail = *list;
   2630  1.1     skrll       if (tail == bfd_abs_section_ptr)
   2631  1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2632  1.1     skrll       while (tail != NULL)
   2633  1.1     skrll 	{
   2634  1.1     skrll 	  asection *curr;
   2635  1.1     skrll 	  asection *prev;
   2636  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_size_type total;
   2637  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_boolean big_sec;
   2638  1.1     skrll 
   2639  1.1     skrll 	  curr = tail;
   2640  1.1     skrll 	  total = tail->size;
   2641  1.1     skrll 	  big_sec = total >= stub_group_size;
   2642  1.1     skrll 
   2643  1.1     skrll 	  while ((prev = PREV_SEC (curr)) != NULL
   2644  1.1     skrll 		 && ((total += curr->output_offset - prev->output_offset)
   2645  1.1     skrll 		     < stub_group_size))
   2646  1.1     skrll 	    curr = prev;
   2647  1.1     skrll 
   2648  1.1     skrll 	  /* OK, the size from the start of CURR to the end is less
   2649  1.1     skrll 	     than 240000 bytes and thus can be handled by one stub
   2650  1.1     skrll 	     section.  (or the tail section is itself larger than
   2651  1.1     skrll 	     240000 bytes, in which case we may be toast.)
   2652  1.1     skrll 	     We should really be keeping track of the total size of
   2653  1.1     skrll 	     stubs added here, as stubs contribute to the final output
   2654  1.1     skrll 	     section size.  That's a little tricky, and this way will
   2655  1.1     skrll 	     only break if stubs added total more than 22144 bytes, or
   2656  1.1     skrll 	     2768 long branch stubs.  It seems unlikely for more than
   2657  1.1     skrll 	     2768 different functions to be called, especially from
   2658  1.1     skrll 	     code only 240000 bytes long.  This limit used to be
   2659  1.1     skrll 	     250000, but c++ code tends to generate lots of little
   2660  1.1     skrll 	     functions, and sometimes violated the assumption.  */
   2661  1.1     skrll 	  do
   2662  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2663  1.1     skrll 	      prev = PREV_SEC (tail);
   2664  1.1     skrll 	      /* Set up this stub group.  */
   2665  1.1     skrll 	      htab->stub_group[tail->id].link_sec = curr;
   2666  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2667  1.1     skrll 	  while (tail != curr && (tail = prev) != NULL);
   2668  1.1     skrll 
   2669  1.1     skrll 	  /* But wait, there's more!  Input sections up to 240000
   2670  1.1     skrll 	     bytes before the stub section can be handled by it too.
   2671  1.1     skrll 	     Don't do this if we have a really large section after the
   2672  1.1     skrll 	     stubs, as adding more stubs increases the chance that
   2673  1.1     skrll 	     branches may not reach into the stub section.  */
   2674  1.1     skrll 	  if (!stubs_always_before_branch && !big_sec)
   2675  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2676  1.1     skrll 	      total = 0;
   2677  1.1     skrll 	      while (prev != NULL
   2678  1.1     skrll 		     && ((total += tail->output_offset - prev->output_offset)
   2679  1.1     skrll 			 < stub_group_size))
   2680  1.1     skrll 		{
   2681  1.1     skrll 		  tail = prev;
   2682  1.1     skrll 		  prev = PREV_SEC (tail);
   2683  1.1     skrll 		  htab->stub_group[tail->id].link_sec = curr;
   2684  1.1     skrll 		}
   2685  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2686  1.1     skrll 	  tail = prev;
   2687  1.1     skrll 	}
   2688  1.1     skrll     }
   2689  1.1     skrll   while (list-- != htab->input_list);
   2690  1.1     skrll   free (htab->input_list);
   2691  1.1     skrll #undef PREV_SEC
   2692  1.1     skrll }
   2693  1.1     skrll 
   2694  1.1     skrll /* Read in all local syms for all input bfds, and create hash entries
   2695  1.1     skrll    for export stubs if we are building a multi-subspace shared lib.
   2696  1.1     skrll    Returns -1 on error, 1 if export stubs created, 0 otherwise.  */
   2697  1.1     skrll 
   2698  1.1     skrll static int
   2699  1.1     skrll get_local_syms (bfd *output_bfd, bfd *input_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2700  1.1     skrll {
   2701  1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_indx;
   2702  1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms, **all_local_syms;
   2703  1.1     skrll   int stub_changed = 0;
   2704  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2705  1.1     skrll 
   2706  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2707  1.3  christos     return -1;
   2708  1.3  christos 
   2709  1.1     skrll   /* We want to read in symbol extension records only once.  To do this
   2710  1.1     skrll      we need to read in the local symbols in parallel and save them for
   2711  1.1     skrll      later use; so hold pointers to the local symbols in an array.  */
   2712  1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt = sizeof (Elf_Internal_Sym *) * htab->bfd_count;
   2713  1.1     skrll   all_local_syms = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
   2714  1.1     skrll   htab->all_local_syms = all_local_syms;
   2715  1.1     skrll   if (all_local_syms == NULL)
   2716  1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2717  1.1     skrll 
   2718  1.1     skrll   /* Walk over all the input BFDs, swapping in local symbols.
   2719  1.1     skrll      If we are creating a shared library, create hash entries for the
   2720  1.1     skrll      export stubs.  */
   2721  1.1     skrll   for (bfd_indx = 0;
   2722  1.1     skrll        input_bfd != NULL;
   2723  1.1     skrll        input_bfd = input_bfd->link_next, bfd_indx++)
   2724  1.1     skrll     {
   2725  1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2726  1.1     skrll 
   2727  1.1     skrll       /* We'll need the symbol table in a second.  */
   2728  1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2729  1.1     skrll       if (symtab_hdr->sh_info == 0)
   2730  1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2731  1.1     skrll 
   2732  1.1     skrll       /* We need an array of the local symbols attached to the input bfd.  */
   2733  1.1     skrll       local_syms = (Elf_Internal_Sym *) symtab_hdr->contents;
   2734  1.1     skrll       if (local_syms == NULL)
   2735  1.1     skrll 	{
   2736  1.1     skrll 	  local_syms = bfd_elf_get_elf_syms (input_bfd, symtab_hdr,
   2737  1.1     skrll 					     symtab_hdr->sh_info, 0,
   2738  1.1     skrll 					     NULL, NULL, NULL);
   2739  1.1     skrll 	  /* Cache them for elf_link_input_bfd.  */
   2740  1.1     skrll 	  symtab_hdr->contents = (unsigned char *) local_syms;
   2741  1.1     skrll 	}
   2742  1.1     skrll       if (local_syms == NULL)
   2743  1.1     skrll 	return -1;
   2744  1.1     skrll 
   2745  1.1     skrll       all_local_syms[bfd_indx] = local_syms;
   2746  1.1     skrll 
   2747  1.1     skrll       if (info->shared && htab->multi_subspace)
   2748  1.1     skrll 	{
   2749  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   2750  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_symend;
   2751  1.1     skrll 	  unsigned int symcount;
   2752  1.1     skrll 
   2753  1.1     skrll 	  symcount = (symtab_hdr->sh_size / sizeof (Elf32_External_Sym)
   2754  1.1     skrll 		      - symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   2755  1.1     skrll 	  eh_syms = (struct elf_link_hash_entry **) elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   2756  1.1     skrll 	  eh_symend = (struct elf_link_hash_entry **) (eh_syms + symcount);
   2757  1.1     skrll 
   2758  1.1     skrll 	  /* Look through the global syms for functions;  We need to
   2759  1.1     skrll 	     build export stubs for all globally visible functions.  */
   2760  1.1     skrll 	  for (; eh_syms < eh_symend; eh_syms++)
   2761  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2762  1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2763  1.1     skrll 
   2764  1.1     skrll 	      hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (*eh_syms);
   2765  1.1     skrll 
   2766  1.1     skrll 	      while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   2767  1.1     skrll 		     || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2768  1.1     skrll 		   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   2769  1.1     skrll 
   2770  1.1     skrll 	      /* At this point in the link, undefined syms have been
   2771  1.1     skrll 		 resolved, so we need to check that the symbol was
   2772  1.1     skrll 		 defined in this BFD.  */
   2773  1.1     skrll 	      if ((hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   2774  1.1     skrll 		   || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   2775  1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.type == STT_FUNC
   2776  1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.root.u.def.section->output_section != NULL
   2777  1.1     skrll 		  && (hh->eh.root.u.def.section->output_section->owner
   2778  1.1     skrll 		      == output_bfd)
   2779  1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.root.u.def.section->owner == input_bfd
   2780  1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.def_regular
   2781  1.1     skrll 		  && !hh->eh.forced_local
   2782  1.1     skrll 		  && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other) == STV_DEFAULT)
   2783  1.1     skrll 		{
   2784  1.1     skrll 		  asection *sec;
   2785  1.1     skrll 		  const char *stub_name;
   2786  1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
   2787  1.1     skrll 
   2788  1.1     skrll 		  sec = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2789  1.1     skrll 		  stub_name = hh_name (hh);
   2790  1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
   2791  1.1     skrll 						      stub_name,
   2792  1.1     skrll 						      FALSE, FALSE);
   2793  1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh == NULL)
   2794  1.1     skrll 		    {
   2795  1.1     skrll 		      hsh = hppa_add_stub (stub_name, sec, htab);
   2796  1.1     skrll 		      if (!hsh)
   2797  1.1     skrll 			return -1;
   2798  1.1     skrll 
   2799  1.1     skrll 		      hsh->target_value = hh->eh.root.u.def.value;
   2800  1.1     skrll 		      hsh->target_section = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2801  1.1     skrll 		      hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_export;
   2802  1.1     skrll 		      hsh->hh = hh;
   2803  1.1     skrll 		      stub_changed = 1;
   2804  1.1     skrll 		    }
   2805  1.1     skrll 		  else
   2806  1.1     skrll 		    {
   2807  1.1     skrll 		      (*_bfd_error_handler) (_("%B: duplicate export stub %s"),
   2808  1.1     skrll 					     input_bfd,
   2809  1.1     skrll 					     stub_name);
   2810  1.1     skrll 		    }
   2811  1.1     skrll 		}
   2812  1.1     skrll 	    }
   2813  1.1     skrll 	}
   2814  1.1     skrll     }
   2815  1.1     skrll 
   2816  1.1     skrll   return stub_changed;
   2817  1.1     skrll }
   2818  1.1     skrll 
   2819  1.1     skrll /* Determine and set the size of the stub section for a final link.
   2820  1.1     skrll 
   2821  1.1     skrll    The basic idea here is to examine all the relocations looking for
   2822  1.1     skrll    PC-relative calls to a target that is unreachable with a "bl"
   2823  1.1     skrll    instruction.  */
   2824  1.1     skrll 
   2825  1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   2826  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_size_stubs
   2827  1.1     skrll   (bfd *output_bfd, bfd *stub_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info,
   2828  1.1     skrll    bfd_boolean multi_subspace, bfd_signed_vma group_size,
   2829  1.1     skrll    asection * (*add_stub_section) (const char *, asection *),
   2830  1.1     skrll    void (*layout_sections_again) (void))
   2831  1.1     skrll {
   2832  1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type stub_group_size;
   2833  1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean stubs_always_before_branch;
   2834  1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean stub_changed;
   2835  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2836  1.1     skrll 
   2837  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2838  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   2839  1.3  christos 
   2840  1.1     skrll   /* Stash our params away.  */
   2841  1.1     skrll   htab->stub_bfd = stub_bfd;
   2842  1.1     skrll   htab->multi_subspace = multi_subspace;
   2843  1.1     skrll   htab->add_stub_section = add_stub_section;
   2844  1.1     skrll   htab->layout_sections_again = layout_sections_again;
   2845  1.1     skrll   stubs_always_before_branch = group_size < 0;
   2846  1.1     skrll   if (group_size < 0)
   2847  1.1     skrll     stub_group_size = -group_size;
   2848  1.1     skrll   else
   2849  1.1     skrll     stub_group_size = group_size;
   2850  1.1     skrll   if (stub_group_size == 1)
   2851  1.1     skrll     {
   2852  1.1     skrll       /* Default values.  */
   2853  1.1     skrll       if (stubs_always_before_branch)
   2854  1.1     skrll 	{
   2855  1.1     skrll 	  stub_group_size = 7680000;
   2856  1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_17bit_branch || htab->multi_subspace)
   2857  1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 240000;
   2858  1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_12bit_branch)
   2859  1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 7500;
   2860  1.1     skrll 	}
   2861  1.1     skrll       else
   2862  1.1     skrll 	{
   2863  1.1     skrll 	  stub_group_size = 6971392;
   2864  1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_17bit_branch || htab->multi_subspace)
   2865  1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 217856;
   2866  1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_12bit_branch)
   2867  1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 6808;
   2868  1.1     skrll 	}
   2869  1.1     skrll     }
   2870  1.1     skrll 
   2871  1.1     skrll   group_sections (htab, stub_group_size, stubs_always_before_branch);
   2872  1.1     skrll 
   2873  1.1     skrll   switch (get_local_syms (output_bfd, info->input_bfds, info))
   2874  1.1     skrll     {
   2875  1.1     skrll     default:
   2876  1.1     skrll       if (htab->all_local_syms)
   2877  1.1     skrll 	goto error_ret_free_local;
   2878  1.1     skrll       return FALSE;
   2879  1.1     skrll 
   2880  1.1     skrll     case 0:
   2881  1.1     skrll       stub_changed = FALSE;
   2882  1.1     skrll       break;
   2883  1.1     skrll 
   2884  1.1     skrll     case 1:
   2885  1.1     skrll       stub_changed = TRUE;
   2886  1.1     skrll       break;
   2887  1.1     skrll     }
   2888  1.1     skrll 
   2889  1.1     skrll   while (1)
   2890  1.1     skrll     {
   2891  1.1     skrll       bfd *input_bfd;
   2892  1.1     skrll       unsigned int bfd_indx;
   2893  1.1     skrll       asection *stub_sec;
   2894  1.1     skrll 
   2895  1.1     skrll       for (input_bfd = info->input_bfds, bfd_indx = 0;
   2896  1.1     skrll 	   input_bfd != NULL;
   2897  1.1     skrll 	   input_bfd = input_bfd->link_next, bfd_indx++)
   2898  1.1     skrll 	{
   2899  1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2900  1.1     skrll 	  asection *section;
   2901  1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms;
   2902  1.1     skrll 
   2903  1.1     skrll 	  /* We'll need the symbol table in a second.  */
   2904  1.1     skrll 	  symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2905  1.1     skrll 	  if (symtab_hdr->sh_info == 0)
   2906  1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   2907  1.1     skrll 
   2908  1.1     skrll 	  local_syms = htab->all_local_syms[bfd_indx];
   2909  1.1     skrll 
   2910  1.1     skrll 	  /* Walk over each section attached to the input bfd.  */
   2911  1.1     skrll 	  for (section = input_bfd->sections;
   2912  1.1     skrll 	       section != NULL;
   2913  1.1     skrll 	       section = section->next)
   2914  1.1     skrll 	    {
   2915  1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela *internal_relocs, *irelaend, *irela;
   2916  1.1     skrll 
   2917  1.1     skrll 	      /* If there aren't any relocs, then there's nothing more
   2918  1.1     skrll 		 to do.  */
   2919  1.1     skrll 	      if ((section->flags & SEC_RELOC) == 0
   2920  1.1     skrll 		  || section->reloc_count == 0)
   2921  1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2922  1.1     skrll 
   2923  1.1     skrll 	      /* If this section is a link-once section that will be
   2924  1.1     skrll 		 discarded, then don't create any stubs.  */
   2925  1.1     skrll 	      if (section->output_section == NULL
   2926  1.1     skrll 		  || section->output_section->owner != output_bfd)
   2927  1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2928  1.1     skrll 
   2929  1.1     skrll 	      /* Get the relocs.  */
   2930  1.1     skrll 	      internal_relocs
   2931  1.1     skrll 		= _bfd_elf_link_read_relocs (input_bfd, section, NULL, NULL,
   2932  1.1     skrll 					     info->keep_memory);
   2933  1.1     skrll 	      if (internal_relocs == NULL)
   2934  1.1     skrll 		goto error_ret_free_local;
   2935  1.1     skrll 
   2936  1.1     skrll 	      /* Now examine each relocation.  */
   2937  1.1     skrll 	      irela = internal_relocs;
   2938  1.1     skrll 	      irelaend = irela + section->reloc_count;
   2939  1.1     skrll 	      for (; irela < irelaend; irela++)
   2940  1.1     skrll 		{
   2941  1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int r_type, r_indx;
   2942  1.1     skrll 		  enum elf32_hppa_stub_type stub_type;
   2943  1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
   2944  1.1     skrll 		  asection *sym_sec;
   2945  1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma sym_value;
   2946  1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma destination;
   2947  1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2948  1.1     skrll 		  char *stub_name;
   2949  1.1     skrll 		  const asection *id_sec;
   2950  1.1     skrll 
   2951  1.1     skrll 		  r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (irela->r_info);
   2952  1.1     skrll 		  r_indx = ELF32_R_SYM (irela->r_info);
   2953  1.1     skrll 
   2954  1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type >= (unsigned int) R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED)
   2955  1.1     skrll 		    {
   2956  1.1     skrll 		      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2957  1.1     skrll 		    error_ret_free_internal:
   2958  1.1     skrll 		      if (elf_section_data (section)->relocs == NULL)
   2959  1.1     skrll 			free (internal_relocs);
   2960  1.1     skrll 		      goto error_ret_free_local;
   2961  1.1     skrll 		    }
   2962  1.1     skrll 
   2963  1.1     skrll 		  /* Only look for stubs on call instructions.  */
   2964  1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F
   2965  1.1     skrll 		      && r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F
   2966  1.1     skrll 		      && r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL22F)
   2967  1.1     skrll 		    continue;
   2968  1.1     skrll 
   2969  1.1     skrll 		  /* Now determine the call target, its name, value,
   2970  1.1     skrll 		     section.  */
   2971  1.1     skrll 		  sym_sec = NULL;
   2972  1.1     skrll 		  sym_value = 0;
   2973  1.1     skrll 		  destination = 0;
   2974  1.1     skrll 		  hh = NULL;
   2975  1.1     skrll 		  if (r_indx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   2976  1.1     skrll 		    {
   2977  1.1     skrll 		      /* It's a local symbol.  */
   2978  1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   2979  1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Shdr *hdr;
   2980  1.1     skrll 		      unsigned int shndx;
   2981  1.1     skrll 
   2982  1.1     skrll 		      sym = local_syms + r_indx;
   2983  1.1     skrll 		      if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) != STT_SECTION)
   2984  1.1     skrll 			sym_value = sym->st_value;
   2985  1.1     skrll 		      shndx = sym->st_shndx;
   2986  1.1     skrll 		      if (shndx < elf_numsections (input_bfd))
   2987  1.1     skrll 			{
   2988  1.1     skrll 			  hdr = elf_elfsections (input_bfd)[shndx];
   2989  1.1     skrll 			  sym_sec = hdr->bfd_section;
   2990  1.1     skrll 			  destination = (sym_value + irela->r_addend
   2991  1.1     skrll 					 + sym_sec->output_offset
   2992  1.1     skrll 					 + sym_sec->output_section->vma);
   2993  1.1     skrll 			}
   2994  1.1     skrll 		    }
   2995  1.1     skrll 		  else
   2996  1.1     skrll 		    {
   2997  1.1     skrll 		      /* It's an external symbol.  */
   2998  1.1     skrll 		      int e_indx;
   2999  1.1     skrll 
   3000  1.1     skrll 		      e_indx = r_indx - symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   3001  1.1     skrll 		      hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd)[e_indx]);
   3002  1.1     skrll 
   3003  1.1     skrll 		      while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   3004  1.1     skrll 			     || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   3005  1.1     skrll 			hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   3006  1.1     skrll 
   3007  1.1     skrll 		      if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   3008  1.1     skrll 			  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   3009  1.1     skrll 			{
   3010  1.1     skrll 			  sym_sec = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   3011  1.1     skrll 			  sym_value = hh->eh.root.u.def.value;
   3012  1.1     skrll 			  if (sym_sec->output_section != NULL)
   3013  1.1     skrll 			    destination = (sym_value + irela->r_addend
   3014  1.1     skrll 					   + sym_sec->output_offset
   3015  1.1     skrll 					   + sym_sec->output_section->vma);
   3016  1.1     skrll 			}
   3017  1.1     skrll 		      else if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3018  1.1     skrll 			{
   3019  1.1     skrll 			  if (! info->shared)
   3020  1.1     skrll 			    continue;
   3021  1.1     skrll 			}
   3022  1.1     skrll 		      else if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)
   3023  1.1     skrll 			{
   3024  1.1     skrll 			  if (! (info->unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_IGNORE
   3025  1.1     skrll 				 && (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other)
   3026  1.1     skrll 				     == STV_DEFAULT)
   3027  1.1     skrll 				 && hh->eh.type != STT_PARISC_MILLI))
   3028  1.1     skrll 			    continue;
   3029  1.1     skrll 			}
   3030  1.1     skrll 		      else
   3031  1.1     skrll 			{
   3032  1.1     skrll 			  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3033  1.1     skrll 			  goto error_ret_free_internal;
   3034  1.1     skrll 			}
   3035  1.1     skrll 		    }
   3036  1.1     skrll 
   3037  1.1     skrll 		  /* Determine what (if any) linker stub is needed.  */
   3038  1.1     skrll 		  stub_type = hppa_type_of_stub (section, irela, hh,
   3039  1.1     skrll 						 destination, info);
   3040  1.1     skrll 		  if (stub_type == hppa_stub_none)
   3041  1.1     skrll 		    continue;
   3042  1.1     skrll 
   3043  1.1     skrll 		  /* Support for grouping stub sections.  */
   3044  1.1     skrll 		  id_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].link_sec;
   3045  1.1     skrll 
   3046  1.1     skrll 		  /* Get the name of this stub.  */
   3047  1.1     skrll 		  stub_name = hppa_stub_name (id_sec, sym_sec, hh, irela);
   3048  1.1     skrll 		  if (!stub_name)
   3049  1.1     skrll 		    goto error_ret_free_internal;
   3050  1.1     skrll 
   3051  1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
   3052  1.1     skrll 						      stub_name,
   3053  1.1     skrll 						      FALSE, FALSE);
   3054  1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh != NULL)
   3055  1.1     skrll 		    {
   3056  1.1     skrll 		      /* The proper stub has already been created.  */
   3057  1.1     skrll 		      free (stub_name);
   3058  1.1     skrll 		      continue;
   3059  1.1     skrll 		    }
   3060  1.1     skrll 
   3061  1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_add_stub (stub_name, section, htab);
   3062  1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh == NULL)
   3063  1.1     skrll 		    {
   3064  1.1     skrll 		      free (stub_name);
   3065  1.1     skrll 		      goto error_ret_free_internal;
   3066  1.1     skrll 		    }
   3067  1.1     skrll 
   3068  1.1     skrll 		  hsh->target_value = sym_value;
   3069  1.1     skrll 		  hsh->target_section = sym_sec;
   3070  1.1     skrll 		  hsh->stub_type = stub_type;
   3071  1.1     skrll 		  if (info->shared)
   3072  1.1     skrll 		    {
   3073  1.1     skrll 		      if (stub_type == hppa_stub_import)
   3074  1.1     skrll 			hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_import_shared;
   3075  1.1     skrll 		      else if (stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch)
   3076  1.1     skrll 			hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_long_branch_shared;
   3077  1.1     skrll 		    }
   3078  1.1     skrll 		  hsh->hh = hh;
   3079  1.1     skrll 		  stub_changed = TRUE;
   3080  1.1     skrll 		}
   3081  1.1     skrll 
   3082  1.1     skrll 	      /* We're done with the internal relocs, free them.  */
   3083  1.1     skrll 	      if (elf_section_data (section)->relocs == NULL)
   3084  1.1     skrll 		free (internal_relocs);
   3085  1.1     skrll 	    }
   3086  1.1     skrll 	}
   3087  1.1     skrll 
   3088  1.1     skrll       if (!stub_changed)
   3089  1.1     skrll 	break;
   3090  1.1     skrll 
   3091  1.1     skrll       /* OK, we've added some stubs.  Find out the new size of the
   3092  1.1     skrll 	 stub sections.  */
   3093  1.1     skrll       for (stub_sec = htab->stub_bfd->sections;
   3094  1.1     skrll 	   stub_sec != NULL;
   3095  1.1     skrll 	   stub_sec = stub_sec->next)
   3096  1.1     skrll 	stub_sec->size = 0;
   3097  1.1     skrll 
   3098  1.1     skrll       bfd_hash_traverse (&htab->bstab, hppa_size_one_stub, htab);
   3099  1.1     skrll 
   3100  1.1     skrll       /* Ask the linker to do its stuff.  */
   3101  1.1     skrll       (*htab->layout_sections_again) ();
   3102  1.1     skrll       stub_changed = FALSE;
   3103  1.1     skrll     }
   3104  1.1     skrll 
   3105  1.1     skrll   free (htab->all_local_syms);
   3106  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3107  1.1     skrll 
   3108  1.1     skrll  error_ret_free_local:
   3109  1.1     skrll   free (htab->all_local_syms);
   3110  1.1     skrll   return FALSE;
   3111  1.1     skrll }
   3112  1.1     skrll 
   3113  1.1     skrll /* For a final link, this function is called after we have sized the
   3114  1.1     skrll    stubs to provide a value for __gp.  */
   3115  1.1     skrll 
   3116  1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   3117  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_set_gp (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3118  1.1     skrll {
   3119  1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h;
   3120  1.1     skrll   asection *sec = NULL;
   3121  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma gp_val = 0;
   3122  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3123  1.1     skrll 
   3124  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3125  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3126  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   3127  1.3  christos 
   3128  1.1     skrll   h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (&htab->etab.root, "$global$", FALSE, FALSE, FALSE);
   3129  1.1     skrll 
   3130  1.1     skrll   if (h != NULL
   3131  1.1     skrll       && (h->type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   3132  1.1     skrll 	  || h->type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
   3133  1.1     skrll     {
   3134  1.1     skrll       gp_val = h->u.def.value;
   3135  1.1     skrll       sec = h->u.def.section;
   3136  1.1     skrll     }
   3137  1.1     skrll   else
   3138  1.1     skrll     {
   3139  1.1     skrll       asection *splt = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".plt");
   3140  1.1     skrll       asection *sgot = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".got");
   3141  1.1     skrll 
   3142  1.1     skrll       /* Choose to point our LTP at, in this order, one of .plt, .got,
   3143  1.1     skrll 	 or .data, if these sections exist.  In the case of choosing
   3144  1.1     skrll 	 .plt try to make the LTP ideal for addressing anywhere in the
   3145  1.1     skrll 	 .plt or .got with a 14 bit signed offset.  Typically, the end
   3146  1.1     skrll 	 of the .plt is the start of the .got, so choose .plt + 0x2000
   3147  1.1     skrll 	 if either the .plt or .got is larger than 0x2000.  If both
   3148  1.1     skrll 	 the .plt and .got are smaller than 0x2000, choose the end of
   3149  1.1     skrll 	 the .plt section.  */
   3150  1.1     skrll       sec = strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") == 0
   3151  1.1     skrll 	  ? NULL : splt;
   3152  1.1     skrll       if (sec != NULL)
   3153  1.1     skrll 	{
   3154  1.1     skrll 	  gp_val = sec->size;
   3155  1.1     skrll 	  if (gp_val > 0x2000 || (sgot && sgot->size > 0x2000))
   3156  1.1     skrll 	    {
   3157  1.1     skrll 	      gp_val = 0x2000;
   3158  1.1     skrll 	    }
   3159  1.1     skrll 	}
   3160  1.1     skrll       else
   3161  1.1     skrll 	{
   3162  1.1     skrll 	  sec = sgot;
   3163  1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL)
   3164  1.1     skrll 	    {
   3165  1.1     skrll 	      if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") != 0)
   3166  1.1     skrll 		{
   3167  1.1     skrll 	          /* We know we don't have a .plt.  If .got is large,
   3168  1.1     skrll 		     offset our LTP.  */
   3169  1.1     skrll 	          if (sec->size > 0x2000)
   3170  1.1     skrll 		    gp_val = 0x2000;
   3171  1.1     skrll 		}
   3172  1.1     skrll 	    }
   3173  1.1     skrll 	  else
   3174  1.1     skrll 	    {
   3175  1.1     skrll 	      /* No .plt or .got.  Who cares what the LTP is?  */
   3176  1.1     skrll 	      sec = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".data");
   3177  1.1     skrll 	    }
   3178  1.1     skrll 	}
   3179  1.1     skrll 
   3180  1.1     skrll       if (h != NULL)
   3181  1.1     skrll 	{
   3182  1.1     skrll 	  h->type = bfd_link_hash_defined;
   3183  1.1     skrll 	  h->u.def.value = gp_val;
   3184  1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL)
   3185  1.1     skrll 	    h->u.def.section = sec;
   3186  1.1     skrll 	  else
   3187  1.1     skrll 	    h->u.def.section = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
   3188  1.1     skrll 	}
   3189  1.1     skrll     }
   3190  1.1     skrll 
   3191  1.1     skrll   if (sec != NULL && sec->output_section != NULL)
   3192  1.1     skrll     gp_val += sec->output_section->vma + sec->output_offset;
   3193  1.1     skrll 
   3194  1.1     skrll   elf_gp (abfd) = gp_val;
   3195  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3196  1.1     skrll }
   3197  1.1     skrll 
   3198  1.1     skrll /* Build all the stubs associated with the current output file.  The
   3199  1.1     skrll    stubs are kept in a hash table attached to the main linker hash
   3200  1.1     skrll    table.  We also set up the .plt entries for statically linked PIC
   3201  1.1     skrll    functions here.  This function is called via hppaelf_finish in the
   3202  1.1     skrll    linker.  */
   3203  1.1     skrll 
   3204  1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   3205  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_build_stubs (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3206  1.1     skrll {
   3207  1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
   3208  1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_table *table;
   3209  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3210  1.1     skrll 
   3211  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3212  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3213  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   3214  1.1     skrll 
   3215  1.1     skrll   for (stub_sec = htab->stub_bfd->sections;
   3216  1.1     skrll        stub_sec != NULL;
   3217  1.1     skrll        stub_sec = stub_sec->next)
   3218  1.1     skrll     {
   3219  1.1     skrll       bfd_size_type size;
   3220  1.1     skrll 
   3221  1.1     skrll       /* Allocate memory to hold the linker stubs.  */
   3222  1.1     skrll       size = stub_sec->size;
   3223  1.1     skrll       stub_sec->contents = bfd_zalloc (htab->stub_bfd, size);
   3224  1.1     skrll       if (stub_sec->contents == NULL && size != 0)
   3225  1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   3226  1.1     skrll       stub_sec->size = 0;
   3227  1.1     skrll     }
   3228  1.1     skrll 
   3229  1.1     skrll   /* Build the stubs as directed by the stub hash table.  */
   3230  1.1     skrll   table = &htab->bstab;
   3231  1.1     skrll   bfd_hash_traverse (table, hppa_build_one_stub, info);
   3232  1.1     skrll 
   3233  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3234  1.1     skrll }
   3235  1.1     skrll 
   3236  1.1     skrll /* Return the base vma address which should be subtracted from the real
   3237  1.1     skrll    address when resolving a dtpoff relocation.
   3238  1.1     skrll    This is PT_TLS segment p_vaddr.  */
   3239  1.1     skrll 
   3240  1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3241  1.1     skrll dtpoff_base (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3242  1.1     skrll {
   3243  1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   3244  1.1     skrll   if (elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec == NULL)
   3245  1.1     skrll     return 0;
   3246  1.1     skrll   return elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec->vma;
   3247  1.1     skrll }
   3248  1.1     skrll 
   3249  1.1     skrll /* Return the relocation value for R_PARISC_TLS_TPOFF*..  */
   3250  1.1     skrll 
   3251  1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3252  1.1     skrll tpoff (struct bfd_link_info *info, bfd_vma address)
   3253  1.1     skrll {
   3254  1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   3255  1.1     skrll 
   3256  1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   3257  1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_sec == NULL)
   3258  1.1     skrll     return 0;
   3259  1.1     skrll   /* hppa TLS ABI is variant I and static TLS block start just after
   3260  1.1     skrll      tcbhead structure which has 2 pointer fields.  */
   3261  1.1     skrll   return (address - htab->tls_sec->vma
   3262  1.1     skrll 	  + align_power ((bfd_vma) 8, htab->tls_sec->alignment_power));
   3263  1.1     skrll }
   3264  1.1     skrll 
   3265  1.1     skrll /* Perform a final link.  */
   3266  1.1     skrll 
   3267  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3268  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_final_link (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3269  1.1     skrll {
   3270  1.1     skrll   /* Invoke the regular ELF linker to do all the work.  */
   3271  1.1     skrll   if (!bfd_elf_final_link (abfd, info))
   3272  1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
   3273  1.1     skrll 
   3274  1.1     skrll   /* If we're producing a final executable, sort the contents of the
   3275  1.1     skrll      unwind section.  */
   3276  1.3  christos   if (info->relocatable)
   3277  1.3  christos     return TRUE;
   3278  1.3  christos 
   3279  1.1     skrll   return elf_hppa_sort_unwind (abfd);
   3280  1.1     skrll }
   3281  1.1     skrll 
   3282  1.1     skrll /* Record the lowest address for the data and text segments.  */
   3283  1.1     skrll 
   3284  1.1     skrll static void
   3285  1.1     skrll hppa_record_segment_addr (bfd *abfd, asection *section, void *data)
   3286  1.1     skrll {
   3287  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3288  1.1     skrll 
   3289  1.1     skrll   htab = (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table*) data;
   3290  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3291  1.3  christos     return;
   3292  1.1     skrll 
   3293  1.1     skrll   if ((section->flags & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD)) == (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD))
   3294  1.1     skrll     {
   3295  1.1     skrll       bfd_vma value;
   3296  1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Phdr *p;
   3297  1.1     skrll 
   3298  1.1     skrll       p = _bfd_elf_find_segment_containing_section (abfd, section->output_section);
   3299  1.1     skrll       BFD_ASSERT (p != NULL);
   3300  1.1     skrll       value = p->p_vaddr;
   3301  1.1     skrll 
   3302  1.1     skrll       if ((section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   3303  1.1     skrll 	{
   3304  1.1     skrll 	  if (value < htab->text_segment_base)
   3305  1.1     skrll 	    htab->text_segment_base = value;
   3306  1.1     skrll 	}
   3307  1.1     skrll       else
   3308  1.1     skrll 	{
   3309  1.1     skrll 	  if (value < htab->data_segment_base)
   3310  1.1     skrll 	    htab->data_segment_base = value;
   3311  1.1     skrll 	}
   3312  1.1     skrll     }
   3313  1.1     skrll }
   3314  1.1     skrll 
   3315  1.1     skrll /* Perform a relocation as part of a final link.  */
   3316  1.1     skrll 
   3317  1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
   3318  1.1     skrll final_link_relocate (asection *input_section,
   3319  1.1     skrll 		     bfd_byte *contents,
   3320  1.1     skrll 		     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
   3321  1.1     skrll 		     bfd_vma value,
   3322  1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab,
   3323  1.1     skrll 		     asection *sym_sec,
   3324  1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
   3325  1.1     skrll 		     struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3326  1.1     skrll {
   3327  1.1     skrll   int insn;
   3328  1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   3329  1.1     skrll   unsigned int orig_r_type = r_type;
   3330  1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto = elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type;
   3331  1.1     skrll   int r_format = howto->bitsize;
   3332  1.1     skrll   enum hppa_reloc_field_selector_type_alt r_field;
   3333  1.1     skrll   bfd *input_bfd = input_section->owner;
   3334  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma offset = rela->r_offset;
   3335  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma max_branch_offset = 0;
   3336  1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *hit_data = contents + offset;
   3337  1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma addend = rela->r_addend;
   3338  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma location;
   3339  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh = NULL;
   3340  1.1     skrll   int val;
   3341  1.1     skrll 
   3342  1.1     skrll   if (r_type == R_PARISC_NONE)
   3343  1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_ok;
   3344  1.1     skrll 
   3345  1.1     skrll   insn = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, hit_data);
   3346  1.1     skrll 
   3347  1.1     skrll   /* Find out where we are and where we're going.  */
   3348  1.1     skrll   location = (offset +
   3349  1.1     skrll 	      input_section->output_offset +
   3350  1.1     skrll 	      input_section->output_section->vma);
   3351  1.1     skrll 
   3352  1.1     skrll   /* If we are not building a shared library, convert DLTIND relocs to
   3353  1.1     skrll      DPREL relocs.  */
   3354  1.1     skrll   if (!info->shared)
   3355  1.1     skrll     {
   3356  1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   3357  1.1     skrll 	{
   3358  1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3359  1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL21L;
   3360  1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3361  1.1     skrll 
   3362  1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3363  1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL14R;
   3364  1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3365  1.1     skrll 
   3366  1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3367  1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL14F;
   3368  1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3369  1.1     skrll 	}
   3370  1.1     skrll     }
   3371  1.1     skrll 
   3372  1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3373  1.1     skrll     {
   3374  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3375  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3376  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3377  1.1     skrll       /* If this call should go via the plt, find the import stub in
   3378  1.1     skrll 	 the stub hash.  */
   3379  1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL
   3380  1.1     skrll 	  || sym_sec->output_section == NULL
   3381  1.1     skrll 	  || (hh != NULL
   3382  1.1     skrll 	      && hh->eh.plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   3383  1.1     skrll 	      && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3384  1.1     skrll 	      && !hh->plabel
   3385  1.1     skrll 	      && (info->shared
   3386  1.1     skrll 		  || !hh->eh.def_regular
   3387  1.1     skrll 		  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)))
   3388  1.1     skrll 	{
   3389  1.1     skrll 	  hsh = hppa_get_stub_entry (input_section, sym_sec,
   3390  1.1     skrll 					    hh, rela, htab);
   3391  1.1     skrll 	  if (hsh != NULL)
   3392  1.1     skrll 	    {
   3393  1.1     skrll 	      value = (hsh->stub_offset
   3394  1.1     skrll 		       + hsh->stub_sec->output_offset
   3395  1.1     skrll 		       + hsh->stub_sec->output_section->vma);
   3396  1.1     skrll 	      addend = 0;
   3397  1.1     skrll 	    }
   3398  1.1     skrll 	  else if (sym_sec == NULL && hh != NULL
   3399  1.1     skrll 		   && hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3400  1.1     skrll 	    {
   3401  1.1     skrll 	      /* It's OK if undefined weak.  Calls to undefined weak
   3402  1.1     skrll 		 symbols behave as if the "called" function
   3403  1.1     skrll 		 immediately returns.  We can thus call to a weak
   3404  1.1     skrll 		 function without first checking whether the function
   3405  1.1     skrll 		 is defined.  */
   3406  1.1     skrll 	      value = location;
   3407  1.1     skrll 	      addend = 8;
   3408  1.1     skrll 	    }
   3409  1.1     skrll 	  else
   3410  1.1     skrll 	    return bfd_reloc_undefined;
   3411  1.1     skrll 	}
   3412  1.1     skrll       /* Fall thru.  */
   3413  1.1     skrll 
   3414  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
   3415  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3416  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3417  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   3418  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14F:
   3419  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   3420  1.1     skrll       /* Make it a pc relative offset.  */
   3421  1.1     skrll       value -= location;
   3422  1.1     skrll       addend -= 8;
   3423  1.1     skrll       break;
   3424  1.1     skrll 
   3425  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3426  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3427  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3428  1.1     skrll       /* Convert instructions that use the linkage table pointer (r19) to
   3429  1.1     skrll 	 instructions that use the global data pointer (dp).  This is the
   3430  1.1     skrll 	 most efficient way of using PIC code in an incomplete executable,
   3431  1.1     skrll 	 but the user must follow the standard runtime conventions for
   3432  1.1     skrll 	 accessing data for this to work.  */
   3433  1.4     skrll       if (orig_r_type == R_PARISC_DLTIND21L)
   3434  1.1     skrll 	{
   3435  1.1     skrll 	  /* Convert addil instructions if the original reloc was a
   3436  1.1     skrll 	     DLTIND21L.  GCC sometimes uses a register other than r19 for
   3437  1.1     skrll 	     the operation, so we must convert any addil instruction
   3438  1.1     skrll 	     that uses this relocation.  */
   3439  1.1     skrll 	  if ((insn & 0xfc000000) == ((int) OP_ADDIL << 26))
   3440  1.1     skrll 	    insn = ADDIL_DP;
   3441  1.1     skrll 	  else
   3442  1.1     skrll 	    /* We must have a ldil instruction.  It's too hard to find
   3443  1.1     skrll 	       and convert the associated add instruction, so issue an
   3444  1.1     skrll 	       error.  */
   3445  1.1     skrll 	    (*_bfd_error_handler)
   3446  1.1     skrll 	      (_("%B(%A+0x%lx): %s fixup for insn 0x%x is not supported in a non-shared link"),
   3447  1.1     skrll 	       input_bfd,
   3448  1.1     skrll 	       input_section,
   3449  1.3  christos 	       (long) offset,
   3450  1.1     skrll 	       howto->name,
   3451  1.1     skrll 	       insn);
   3452  1.1     skrll 	}
   3453  1.1     skrll       else if (orig_r_type == R_PARISC_DLTIND14F)
   3454  1.1     skrll 	{
   3455  1.1     skrll 	  /* This must be a format 1 load/store.  Change the base
   3456  1.1     skrll 	     register to dp.  */
   3457  1.1     skrll 	  insn = (insn & 0xfc1ffff) | (27 << 21);
   3458  1.1     skrll 	}
   3459  1.1     skrll 
   3460  1.1     skrll     /* For all the DP relative relocations, we need to examine the symbol's
   3461  1.1     skrll        section.  If it has no section or if it's a code section, then
   3462  1.1     skrll        "data pointer relative" makes no sense.  In that case we don't
   3463  1.1     skrll        adjust the "value", and for 21 bit addil instructions, we change the
   3464  1.1     skrll        source addend register from %dp to %r0.  This situation commonly
   3465  1.1     skrll        arises for undefined weak symbols and when a variable's "constness"
   3466  1.1     skrll        is declared differently from the way the variable is defined.  For
   3467  1.1     skrll        instance: "extern int foo" with foo defined as "const int foo".  */
   3468  1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL || (sym_sec->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   3469  1.1     skrll 	{
   3470  1.1     skrll 	  if ((insn & ((0x3f << 26) | (0x1f << 21)))
   3471  1.1     skrll 	      == (((int) OP_ADDIL << 26) | (27 << 21)))
   3472  1.1     skrll 	    {
   3473  1.1     skrll 	      insn &= ~ (0x1f << 21);
   3474  1.1     skrll 	    }
   3475  1.1     skrll 	  /* Now try to make things easy for the dynamic linker.  */
   3476  1.1     skrll 
   3477  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3478  1.1     skrll 	}
   3479  1.1     skrll       /* Fall thru.  */
   3480  1.1     skrll 
   3481  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3482  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3483  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3484  1.4     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3485  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3486  1.4     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3487  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3488  1.4     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3489  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3490  1.1     skrll       value -= elf_gp (input_section->output_section->owner);
   3491  1.1     skrll       break;
   3492  1.1     skrll 
   3493  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3494  1.1     skrll       if ((sym_sec->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   3495  1.1     skrll 	value -= htab->text_segment_base;
   3496  1.1     skrll       else
   3497  1.1     skrll 	value -= htab->data_segment_base;
   3498  1.1     skrll       break;
   3499  1.1     skrll 
   3500  1.1     skrll     default:
   3501  1.1     skrll       break;
   3502  1.1     skrll     }
   3503  1.1     skrll 
   3504  1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3505  1.1     skrll     {
   3506  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR32:
   3507  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR14F:
   3508  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3509  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3510  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14F:
   3511  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   3512  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3513  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   3514  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3515  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGBASE:
   3516  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3517  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32:
   3518  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32:
   3519  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32:
   3520  1.1     skrll       r_field = e_fsel;
   3521  1.1     skrll       break;
   3522  1.1     skrll 
   3523  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3524  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
   3525  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   3526  1.1     skrll       r_field = e_lsel;
   3527  1.1     skrll       break;
   3528  1.1     skrll 
   3529  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
   3530  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3531  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3532  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3533  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L:
   3534  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3535  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
   3536  1.1     skrll       r_field = e_lrsel;
   3537  1.1     skrll       break;
   3538  1.1     skrll 
   3539  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3540  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   3541  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   3542  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3543  1.1     skrll       r_field = e_rsel;
   3544  1.1     skrll       break;
   3545  1.1     skrll 
   3546  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3547  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   3548  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3549  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3550  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3551  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO14R:
   3552  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3553  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
   3554  1.1     skrll       r_field = e_rrsel;
   3555  1.1     skrll       break;
   3556  1.1     skrll 
   3557  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3558  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3559  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3560  1.1     skrll       r_field = e_fsel;
   3561  1.1     skrll 
   3562  1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F)
   3563  1.1     skrll 	{
   3564  1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (17-1)) << 2;
   3565  1.1     skrll 	}
   3566  1.1     skrll       else if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F)
   3567  1.1     skrll 	{
   3568  1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (12-1)) << 2;
   3569  1.1     skrll 	}
   3570  1.1     skrll       else
   3571  1.1     skrll 	{
   3572  1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (22-1)) << 2;
   3573  1.1     skrll 	}
   3574  1.1     skrll 
   3575  1.1     skrll       /* sym_sec is NULL on undefined weak syms or when shared on
   3576  1.1     skrll 	 undefined syms.  We've already checked for a stub for the
   3577  1.1     skrll 	 shared undefined case.  */
   3578  1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL)
   3579  1.1     skrll 	break;
   3580  1.1     skrll 
   3581  1.1     skrll       /* If the branch is out of reach, then redirect the
   3582  1.1     skrll 	 call to the local stub for this function.  */
   3583  1.1     skrll       if (value + addend + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
   3584  1.1     skrll 	{
   3585  1.1     skrll 	  hsh = hppa_get_stub_entry (input_section, sym_sec,
   3586  1.1     skrll 					    hh, rela, htab);
   3587  1.1     skrll 	  if (hsh == NULL)
   3588  1.1     skrll 	    return bfd_reloc_undefined;
   3589  1.1     skrll 
   3590  1.1     skrll 	  /* Munge up the value and addend so that we call the stub
   3591  1.1     skrll 	     rather than the procedure directly.  */
   3592  1.1     skrll 	  value = (hsh->stub_offset
   3593  1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->stub_sec->output_offset
   3594  1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->stub_sec->output_section->vma
   3595  1.1     skrll 		   - location);
   3596  1.1     skrll 	  addend = -8;
   3597  1.1     skrll 	}
   3598  1.1     skrll       break;
   3599  1.1     skrll 
   3600  1.1     skrll     /* Something we don't know how to handle.  */
   3601  1.1     skrll     default:
   3602  1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_notsupported;
   3603  1.1     skrll     }
   3604  1.1     skrll 
   3605  1.1     skrll   /* Make sure we can reach the stub.  */
   3606  1.1     skrll   if (max_branch_offset != 0
   3607  1.1     skrll       && value + addend + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
   3608  1.1     skrll     {
   3609  1.1     skrll       (*_bfd_error_handler)
   3610  1.1     skrll 	(_("%B(%A+0x%lx): cannot reach %s, recompile with -ffunction-sections"),
   3611  1.1     skrll 	 input_bfd,
   3612  1.1     skrll 	 input_section,
   3613  1.3  christos 	 (long) offset,
   3614  1.1     skrll 	 hsh->bh_root.string);
   3615  1.1     skrll       bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3616  1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_notsupported;
   3617  1.1     skrll     }
   3618  1.1     skrll 
   3619  1.1     skrll   val = hppa_field_adjust (value, addend, r_field);
   3620  1.1     skrll 
   3621  1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3622  1.1     skrll     {
   3623  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3624  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3625  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3626  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3627  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3628  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3629  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3630  1.1     skrll       /* This is a branch.  Divide the offset by four.
   3631  1.1     skrll 	 Note that we need to decide whether it's a branch or
   3632  1.1     skrll 	 otherwise by inspecting the reloc.  Inspecting insn won't
   3633  1.1     skrll 	 work as insn might be from a .word directive.  */
   3634  1.1     skrll       val >>= 2;
   3635  1.1     skrll       break;
   3636  1.1     skrll 
   3637  1.1     skrll     default:
   3638  1.1     skrll       break;
   3639  1.1     skrll     }
   3640  1.1     skrll 
   3641  1.1     skrll   insn = hppa_rebuild_insn (insn, val, r_format);
   3642  1.1     skrll 
   3643  1.1     skrll   /* Update the instruction word.  */
   3644  1.1     skrll   bfd_put_32 (input_bfd, (bfd_vma) insn, hit_data);
   3645  1.1     skrll   return bfd_reloc_ok;
   3646  1.1     skrll }
   3647  1.1     skrll 
   3648  1.1     skrll /* Relocate an HPPA ELF section.  */
   3649  1.1     skrll 
   3650  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3651  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_relocate_section (bfd *output_bfd,
   3652  1.1     skrll 			     struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3653  1.1     skrll 			     bfd *input_bfd,
   3654  1.1     skrll 			     asection *input_section,
   3655  1.1     skrll 			     bfd_byte *contents,
   3656  1.1     skrll 			     Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs,
   3657  1.1     skrll 			     Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms,
   3658  1.1     skrll 			     asection **local_sections)
   3659  1.1     skrll {
   3660  1.1     skrll   bfd_vma *local_got_offsets;
   3661  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3662  1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   3663  1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *rela;
   3664  1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *relend;
   3665  1.1     skrll 
   3666  1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   3667  1.1     skrll 
   3668  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3669  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3670  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   3671  1.3  christos 
   3672  1.1     skrll   local_got_offsets = elf_local_got_offsets (input_bfd);
   3673  1.1     skrll 
   3674  1.1     skrll   rela = relocs;
   3675  1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + input_section->reloc_count;
   3676  1.1     skrll   for (; rela < relend; rela++)
   3677  1.1     skrll     {
   3678  1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   3679  1.1     skrll       reloc_howto_type *howto;
   3680  1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_symndx;
   3681  1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   3682  1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   3683  1.1     skrll       asection *sym_sec;
   3684  1.1     skrll       bfd_vma relocation;
   3685  1.1     skrll       bfd_reloc_status_type rstatus;
   3686  1.1     skrll       const char *sym_name;
   3687  1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean plabel;
   3688  1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean warned_undef;
   3689  1.1     skrll 
   3690  1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   3691  1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= (unsigned int) R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED)
   3692  1.1     skrll 	{
   3693  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3694  1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
   3695  1.1     skrll 	}
   3696  1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY
   3697  1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT)
   3698  1.1     skrll 	continue;
   3699  1.1     skrll 
   3700  1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   3701  1.1     skrll       hh = NULL;
   3702  1.1     skrll       sym = NULL;
   3703  1.1     skrll       sym_sec = NULL;
   3704  1.1     skrll       warned_undef = FALSE;
   3705  1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   3706  1.1     skrll 	{
   3707  1.1     skrll 	  /* This is a local symbol, h defaults to NULL.  */
   3708  1.1     skrll 	  sym = local_syms + r_symndx;
   3709  1.1     skrll 	  sym_sec = local_sections[r_symndx];
   3710  1.1     skrll 	  relocation = _bfd_elf_rela_local_sym (output_bfd, sym, &sym_sec, rela);
   3711  1.1     skrll 	}
   3712  1.1     skrll       else
   3713  1.1     skrll 	{
   3714  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh;
   3715  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_boolean unresolved_reloc;
   3716  1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   3717  1.1     skrll 
   3718  1.1     skrll 	  RELOC_FOR_GLOBAL_SYMBOL (info, input_bfd, input_section, rela,
   3719  1.1     skrll 				   r_symndx, symtab_hdr, sym_hashes,
   3720  1.1     skrll 				   eh, sym_sec, relocation,
   3721  1.1     skrll 				   unresolved_reloc, warned_undef);
   3722  1.1     skrll 
   3723  1.1     skrll 	  if (!info->relocatable
   3724  1.1     skrll 	      && relocation == 0
   3725  1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
   3726  1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak
   3727  1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3728  1.1     skrll 	    {
   3729  1.1     skrll 	      if (info->unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_IGNORE
   3730  1.1     skrll 		  && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) == STV_DEFAULT
   3731  1.1     skrll 		  && eh->type == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   3732  1.1     skrll 		{
   3733  1.1     skrll 		  if (! info->callbacks->undefined_symbol
   3734  1.1     skrll 		      (info, eh_name (eh), input_bfd,
   3735  1.1     skrll 		       input_section, rela->r_offset, FALSE))
   3736  1.1     skrll 		    return FALSE;
   3737  1.1     skrll 		  warned_undef = TRUE;
   3738  1.1     skrll 		}
   3739  1.1     skrll 	    }
   3740  1.1     skrll 	  hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   3741  1.1     skrll 	}
   3742  1.1     skrll 
   3743  1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec != NULL && elf_discarded_section (sym_sec))
   3744  1.3  christos 	RELOC_AGAINST_DISCARDED_SECTION (info, input_bfd, input_section,
   3745  1.3  christos 					 rela, relend,
   3746  1.3  christos 					 elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type,
   3747  1.3  christos 					 contents);
   3748  1.1     skrll 
   3749  1.1     skrll       if (info->relocatable)
   3750  1.1     skrll 	continue;
   3751  1.1     skrll 
   3752  1.1     skrll       /* Do any required modifications to the relocation value, and
   3753  1.1     skrll 	 determine what types of dynamic info we need to output, if
   3754  1.1     skrll 	 any.  */
   3755  1.1     skrll       plabel = 0;
   3756  1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   3757  1.1     skrll 	{
   3758  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3759  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3760  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3761  1.1     skrll 	  {
   3762  1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   3763  1.1     skrll 	    bfd_boolean do_got = 0;
   3764  1.1     skrll 
   3765  1.1     skrll 	    /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   3766  1.1     skrll 	       global offset table.  */
   3767  1.1     skrll 	    if (hh != NULL)
   3768  1.1     skrll 	      {
   3769  1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean dyn;
   3770  1.1     skrll 
   3771  1.1     skrll 		off = hh->eh.got.offset;
   3772  1.1     skrll 		dyn = htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created;
   3773  1.1     skrll 		if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn, info->shared,
   3774  1.1     skrll 						       &hh->eh))
   3775  1.1     skrll 		  {
   3776  1.1     skrll 		    /* If we aren't going to call finish_dynamic_symbol,
   3777  1.1     skrll 		       then we need to handle initialisation of the .got
   3778  1.1     skrll 		       entry and create needed relocs here.  Since the
   3779  1.1     skrll 		       offset must always be a multiple of 4, we use the
   3780  1.1     skrll 		       least significant bit to record whether we have
   3781  1.1     skrll 		       initialised it already.  */
   3782  1.1     skrll 		    if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3783  1.1     skrll 		      off &= ~1;
   3784  1.1     skrll 		    else
   3785  1.1     skrll 		      {
   3786  1.1     skrll 			hh->eh.got.offset |= 1;
   3787  1.1     skrll 			do_got = 1;
   3788  1.1     skrll 		      }
   3789  1.1     skrll 		  }
   3790  1.1     skrll 	      }
   3791  1.1     skrll 	    else
   3792  1.1     skrll 	      {
   3793  1.1     skrll 		/* Local symbol case.  */
   3794  1.1     skrll 		if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3795  1.1     skrll 		  abort ();
   3796  1.1     skrll 
   3797  1.1     skrll 		off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   3798  1.1     skrll 
   3799  1.1     skrll 		/* The offset must always be a multiple of 4.  We use
   3800  1.1     skrll 		   the least significant bit to record whether we have
   3801  1.1     skrll 		   already generated the necessary reloc.  */
   3802  1.1     skrll 		if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3803  1.1     skrll 		  off &= ~1;
   3804  1.1     skrll 		else
   3805  1.1     skrll 		  {
   3806  1.1     skrll 		    local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3807  1.1     skrll 		    do_got = 1;
   3808  1.1     skrll 		  }
   3809  1.1     skrll 	      }
   3810  1.1     skrll 
   3811  1.1     skrll 	    if (do_got)
   3812  1.1     skrll 	      {
   3813  1.1     skrll 		if (info->shared)
   3814  1.1     skrll 		  {
   3815  1.1     skrll 		    /* Output a dynamic relocation for this GOT entry.
   3816  1.1     skrll 		       In this case it is relative to the base of the
   3817  1.1     skrll 		       object because the symbol index is zero.  */
   3818  1.1     skrll 		    Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3819  1.1     skrll 		    bfd_byte *loc;
   3820  1.1     skrll 		    asection *sec = htab->srelgot;
   3821  1.1     skrll 
   3822  1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_offset = (off
   3823  1.1     skrll 				       + htab->sgot->output_offset
   3824  1.1     skrll 				       + htab->sgot->output_section->vma);
   3825  1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   3826  1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   3827  1.1     skrll 		    loc = sec->contents;
   3828  1.1     skrll 		    loc += sec->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3829  1.1     skrll 		    bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3830  1.1     skrll 		  }
   3831  1.1     skrll 		else
   3832  1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation,
   3833  1.1     skrll 			      htab->sgot->contents + off);
   3834  1.1     skrll 	      }
   3835  1.1     skrll 
   3836  1.1     skrll 	    if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3837  1.1     skrll 	      abort ();
   3838  1.1     skrll 
   3839  1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   3840  1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   3841  1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_offset
   3842  1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_section->vma);
   3843  1.1     skrll 	  }
   3844  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3845  1.1     skrll 
   3846  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3847  1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is the first SEGREL relocation, then initialize
   3848  1.1     skrll 	     the segment base values.  */
   3849  1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->text_segment_base == (bfd_vma) -1)
   3850  1.1     skrll 	    bfd_map_over_sections (output_bfd, hppa_record_segment_addr, htab);
   3851  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3852  1.1     skrll 
   3853  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   3854  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   3855  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   3856  1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   3857  1.1     skrll 	    {
   3858  1.1     skrll 	      bfd_vma off;
   3859  1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean do_plt = 0;
   3860  1.1     skrll 	      /* If we have a global symbol with a PLT slot, then
   3861  1.1     skrll 		 redirect this relocation to it.  */
   3862  1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   3863  1.1     skrll 		{
   3864  1.1     skrll 		  off = hh->eh.plt.offset;
   3865  1.1     skrll 		  if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, info->shared,
   3866  1.1     skrll 							 &hh->eh))
   3867  1.1     skrll 		    {
   3868  1.1     skrll 		      /* In a non-shared link, adjust_dynamic_symbols
   3869  1.1     skrll 			 isn't called for symbols forced local.  We
   3870  1.1     skrll 			 need to write out the plt entry here.  */
   3871  1.1     skrll 		      if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3872  1.1     skrll 			off &= ~1;
   3873  1.1     skrll 		      else
   3874  1.1     skrll 			{
   3875  1.1     skrll 			  hh->eh.plt.offset |= 1;
   3876  1.1     skrll 			  do_plt = 1;
   3877  1.1     skrll 			}
   3878  1.1     skrll 		    }
   3879  1.1     skrll 		}
   3880  1.1     skrll 	      else
   3881  1.1     skrll 		{
   3882  1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma *local_plt_offsets;
   3883  1.1     skrll 
   3884  1.1     skrll 		  if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3885  1.1     skrll 		    abort ();
   3886  1.1     skrll 
   3887  1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_offsets = local_got_offsets + symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   3888  1.1     skrll 		  off = local_plt_offsets[r_symndx];
   3889  1.1     skrll 
   3890  1.1     skrll 		  /* As for the local .got entry case, we use the last
   3891  1.1     skrll 		     bit to record whether we've already initialised
   3892  1.1     skrll 		     this local .plt entry.  */
   3893  1.1     skrll 		  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3894  1.1     skrll 		    off &= ~1;
   3895  1.1     skrll 		  else
   3896  1.1     skrll 		    {
   3897  1.1     skrll 		      local_plt_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3898  1.1     skrll 		      do_plt = 1;
   3899  1.1     skrll 		    }
   3900  1.1     skrll 		}
   3901  1.1     skrll 
   3902  1.1     skrll 	      if (do_plt)
   3903  1.1     skrll 		{
   3904  1.1     skrll 		  if (info->shared)
   3905  1.1     skrll 		    {
   3906  1.1     skrll 		      /* Output a dynamic IPLT relocation for this
   3907  1.1     skrll 			 PLT entry.  */
   3908  1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3909  1.1     skrll 		      bfd_byte *loc;
   3910  1.1     skrll 		      asection *s = htab->srelplt;
   3911  1.1     skrll 
   3912  1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_offset = (off
   3913  1.1     skrll 					 + htab->splt->output_offset
   3914  1.1     skrll 					 + htab->splt->output_section->vma);
   3915  1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   3916  1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   3917  1.1     skrll 		      loc = s->contents;
   3918  1.1     skrll 		      loc += s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3919  1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3920  1.1     skrll 		    }
   3921  1.1     skrll 		  else
   3922  1.1     skrll 		    {
   3923  1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3924  1.1     skrll 				  relocation,
   3925  1.1     skrll 				  htab->splt->contents + off);
   3926  1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3927  1.1     skrll 				  elf_gp (htab->splt->output_section->owner),
   3928  1.1     skrll 				  htab->splt->contents + off + 4);
   3929  1.1     skrll 		    }
   3930  1.1     skrll 		}
   3931  1.1     skrll 
   3932  1.1     skrll 	      if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3933  1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3934  1.1     skrll 
   3935  1.1     skrll 	      /* PLABELs contain function pointers.  Relocation is to
   3936  1.1     skrll 		 the entry for the function in the .plt.  The magic +2
   3937  1.1     skrll 		 offset signals to $$dyncall that the function pointer
   3938  1.1     skrll 		 is in the .plt and thus has a gp pointer too.
   3939  1.1     skrll 		 Exception:  Undefined PLABELs should have a value of
   3940  1.1     skrll 		 zero.  */
   3941  1.1     skrll 	      if (hh == NULL
   3942  1.1     skrll 		  || (hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   3943  1.1     skrll 		      && hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefined))
   3944  1.1     skrll 		{
   3945  1.1     skrll 		  relocation = (off
   3946  1.1     skrll 				+ htab->splt->output_offset
   3947  1.1     skrll 				+ htab->splt->output_section->vma
   3948  1.1     skrll 				+ 2);
   3949  1.1     skrll 		}
   3950  1.1     skrll 	      plabel = 1;
   3951  1.1     skrll 	    }
   3952  1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through and possibly emit a dynamic relocation.  */
   3953  1.1     skrll 
   3954  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3955  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3956  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14F:
   3957  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   3958  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
   3959  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3960  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3961  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3962  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR32:
   3963  1.1     skrll 	  if ((input_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
   3964  1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3965  1.1     skrll 
   3966  1.1     skrll 	  /* The reloc types handled here and this conditional
   3967  1.1     skrll 	     expression must match the code in ..check_relocs and
   3968  1.1     skrll 	     allocate_dynrelocs.  ie. We need exactly the same condition
   3969  1.1     skrll 	     as in ..check_relocs, with some extra conditions (dynindx
   3970  1.1     skrll 	     test in this case) to cater for relocs removed by
   3971  1.1     skrll 	     allocate_dynrelocs.  If you squint, the non-shared test
   3972  1.1     skrll 	     here does indeed match the one in ..check_relocs, the
   3973  1.1     skrll 	     difference being that here we test DEF_DYNAMIC as well as
   3974  1.1     skrll 	     !DEF_REGULAR.  All common syms end up with !DEF_REGULAR,
   3975  1.1     skrll 	     which is why we can't use just that test here.
   3976  1.1     skrll 	     Conversely, DEF_DYNAMIC can't be used in check_relocs as
   3977  1.1     skrll 	     there all files have not been loaded.  */
   3978  1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->shared
   3979  1.1     skrll 	       && (hh == NULL
   3980  1.1     skrll 		   || ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other) == STV_DEFAULT
   3981  1.1     skrll 		   || hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3982  1.1     skrll 	       && (IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   3983  1.1     skrll 		   || !SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh)))
   3984  1.1     skrll 	      || (!info->shared
   3985  1.1     skrll 		  && hh != NULL
   3986  1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3987  1.1     skrll 		  && !hh->eh.non_got_ref
   3988  1.1     skrll 		  && ((ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   3989  1.1     skrll 		       && hh->eh.def_dynamic
   3990  1.1     skrll 		       && !hh->eh.def_regular)
   3991  1.1     skrll 		      || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   3992  1.1     skrll 		      || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)))
   3993  1.1     skrll 	    {
   3994  1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3995  1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean skip;
   3996  1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   3997  1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   3998  1.1     skrll 
   3999  1.1     skrll 	      /* When generating a shared object, these relocations
   4000  1.1     skrll 		 are copied into the output file to be resolved at run
   4001  1.1     skrll 		 time.  */
   4002  1.1     skrll 
   4003  1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_addend = rela->r_addend;
   4004  1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset =
   4005  1.1     skrll 		_bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   4006  1.1     skrll 					 rela->r_offset);
   4007  1.1     skrll 	      skip = (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   4008  1.1     skrll 		      || outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2);
   4009  1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_offset
   4010  1.1     skrll 				  + input_section->output_section->vma);
   4011  1.1     skrll 
   4012  1.1     skrll 	      if (skip)
   4013  1.1     skrll 		{
   4014  1.1     skrll 		  memset (&outrel, 0, sizeof (outrel));
   4015  1.1     skrll 		}
   4016  1.1     skrll 	      else if (hh != NULL
   4017  1.1     skrll 		       && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   4018  1.1     skrll 		       && (plabel
   4019  1.1     skrll 			   || !IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   4020  1.1     skrll 			   || !info->shared
   4021  1.1     skrll 			   || !info->symbolic
   4022  1.1     skrll 			   || !hh->eh.def_regular))
   4023  1.1     skrll 		{
   4024  1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (hh->eh.dynindx, r_type);
   4025  1.1     skrll 		}
   4026  1.1     skrll 	      else /* It's a local symbol, or one marked to become local.  */
   4027  1.1     skrll 		{
   4028  1.1     skrll 		  int indx = 0;
   4029  1.1     skrll 
   4030  1.1     skrll 		  /* Add the absolute offset of the symbol.  */
   4031  1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend += relocation;
   4032  1.1     skrll 
   4033  1.1     skrll 		  /* Global plabels need to be processed by the
   4034  1.1     skrll 		     dynamic linker so that functions have at most one
   4035  1.1     skrll 		     fptr.  For this reason, we need to differentiate
   4036  1.1     skrll 		     between global and local plabels, which we do by
   4037  1.1     skrll 		     providing the function symbol for a global plabel
   4038  1.1     skrll 		     reloc, and no symbol for local plabels.  */
   4039  1.1     skrll 		  if (! plabel
   4040  1.1     skrll 		      && sym_sec != NULL
   4041  1.1     skrll 		      && sym_sec->output_section != NULL
   4042  1.1     skrll 		      && ! bfd_is_abs_section (sym_sec))
   4043  1.1     skrll 		    {
   4044  1.1     skrll 		      asection *osec;
   4045  1.1     skrll 
   4046  1.1     skrll 		      osec = sym_sec->output_section;
   4047  1.1     skrll 		      indx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   4048  1.1     skrll 		      if (indx == 0)
   4049  1.1     skrll 			{
   4050  1.1     skrll 			  osec = htab->etab.text_index_section;
   4051  1.1     skrll 			  indx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   4052  1.1     skrll 			}
   4053  1.1     skrll 		      BFD_ASSERT (indx != 0);
   4054  1.1     skrll 
   4055  1.1     skrll 		      /* We are turning this relocation into one
   4056  1.1     skrll 			 against a section symbol, so subtract out the
   4057  1.1     skrll 			 output section's address but not the offset
   4058  1.1     skrll 			 of the input section in the output section.  */
   4059  1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend -= osec->vma;
   4060  1.1     skrll 		    }
   4061  1.1     skrll 
   4062  1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, r_type);
   4063  1.1     skrll 		}
   4064  1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   4065  1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   4066  1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   4067  1.1     skrll 
   4068  1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   4069  1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4070  1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4071  1.1     skrll 	    }
   4072  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4073  1.1     skrll 
   4074  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   4075  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   4076  1.1     skrll 	  {
   4077  1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   4078  1.1     skrll 
   4079  1.1     skrll 	    off = htab->tls_ldm_got.offset;
   4080  1.1     skrll 	    if (off & 1)
   4081  1.1     skrll 	      off &= ~1;
   4082  1.1     skrll 	    else
   4083  1.1     skrll 	      {
   4084  1.1     skrll 		Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   4085  1.1     skrll 		bfd_byte *loc;
   4086  1.1     skrll 
   4087  1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_offset = (off
   4088  1.1     skrll 				   + htab->sgot->output_section->vma
   4089  1.1     skrll 				   + htab->sgot->output_offset);
   4090  1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4091  1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32);
   4092  1.1     skrll 		loc = htab->srelgot->contents;
   4093  1.1     skrll 		loc += htab->srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4094  1.1     skrll 
   4095  1.1     skrll 		bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4096  1.1     skrll 		htab->tls_ldm_got.offset |= 1;
   4097  1.1     skrll 	      }
   4098  1.1     skrll 
   4099  1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   4100  1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   4101  1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_offset
   4102  1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_section->vma);
   4103  1.1     skrll 
   4104  1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4105  1.1     skrll 	  }
   4106  1.1     skrll 
   4107  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L:
   4108  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO14R:
   4109  1.1     skrll 	  relocation -= dtpoff_base (info);
   4110  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4111  1.1     skrll 
   4112  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   4113  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   4114  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   4115  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   4116  1.1     skrll 	  {
   4117  1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   4118  1.1     skrll 	    int indx;
   4119  1.1     skrll 	    char tls_type;
   4120  1.1     skrll 
   4121  1.1     skrll 	    indx = 0;
   4122  1.1     skrll 	    if (hh != NULL)
   4123  1.1     skrll 	      {
   4124  1.1     skrll 	        bfd_boolean dyn;
   4125  1.1     skrll 	        dyn = htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created;
   4126  1.1     skrll 
   4127  1.1     skrll 		if (WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn, info->shared, &hh->eh)
   4128  1.1     skrll 		    && (!info->shared
   4129  1.1     skrll 			|| !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh)))
   4130  1.1     skrll 		  {
   4131  1.1     skrll 		    indx = hh->eh.dynindx;
   4132  1.1     skrll 		  }
   4133  1.1     skrll 		off = hh->eh.got.offset;
   4134  1.1     skrll 		tls_type = hh->tls_type;
   4135  1.1     skrll 	      }
   4136  1.1     skrll 	    else
   4137  1.1     skrll 	      {
   4138  1.1     skrll 		off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   4139  1.1     skrll 		tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd)[r_symndx];
   4140  1.1     skrll 	      }
   4141  1.1     skrll 
   4142  1.1     skrll 	    if (tls_type == GOT_UNKNOWN)
   4143  1.1     skrll 	      abort ();
   4144  1.1     skrll 
   4145  1.1     skrll 	    if ((off & 1) != 0)
   4146  1.1     skrll 	      off &= ~1;
   4147  1.1     skrll 	    else
   4148  1.1     skrll 	      {
   4149  1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean need_relocs = FALSE;
   4150  1.1     skrll 		Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   4151  1.1     skrll 		bfd_byte *loc = NULL;
   4152  1.1     skrll 		int cur_off = off;
   4153  1.1     skrll 
   4154  1.1     skrll 	        /* The GOT entries have not been initialized yet.  Do it
   4155  1.1     skrll 	           now, and emit any relocations.  If both an IE GOT and a
   4156  1.1     skrll 	           GD GOT are necessary, we emit the GD first.  */
   4157  1.1     skrll 
   4158  1.1     skrll 		if ((info->shared || indx != 0)
   4159  1.1     skrll 		    && (hh == NULL
   4160  1.1     skrll 			|| ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other) == STV_DEFAULT
   4161  1.1     skrll 			|| hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak))
   4162  1.1     skrll 		  {
   4163  1.1     skrll 		    need_relocs = TRUE;
   4164  1.1     skrll 		    loc = htab->srelgot->contents;
   4165  1.1     skrll 		    /* FIXME (CAO): Should this be reloc_count++ ? */
   4166  1.1     skrll 		    loc += htab->srelgot->reloc_count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4167  1.1     skrll 		  }
   4168  1.1     skrll 
   4169  1.1     skrll 		if (tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD)
   4170  1.1     skrll 		  {
   4171  1.1     skrll 		    if (need_relocs)
   4172  1.1     skrll 		      {
   4173  1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_offset = (cur_off
   4174  1.1     skrll 					   + htab->sgot->output_section->vma
   4175  1.1     skrll 					   + htab->sgot->output_offset);
   4176  1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx,R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32);
   4177  1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4178  1.1     skrll 			bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0, htab->sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4179  1.1     skrll 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4180  1.1     skrll 			htab->srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4181  1.1     skrll 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4182  1.1     skrll 
   4183  1.1     skrll 			if (indx == 0)
   4184  1.1     skrll 			  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
   4185  1.1     skrll 				      htab->sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   4186  1.1     skrll 			else
   4187  1.1     skrll 			  {
   4188  1.1     skrll 			    bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   4189  1.1     skrll 					htab->sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   4190  1.1     skrll 			    outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32);
   4191  1.1     skrll 			    outrel.r_offset += 4;
   4192  1.1     skrll 			    bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel,loc);
   4193  1.1     skrll 			    htab->srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4194  1.1     skrll 			    loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4195  1.1     skrll 			  }
   4196  1.1     skrll 		      }
   4197  1.1     skrll 		    else
   4198  1.1     skrll 		      {
   4199  1.1     skrll 		        /* If we are not emitting relocations for a
   4200  1.1     skrll 		           general dynamic reference, then we must be in a
   4201  1.1     skrll 		           static link or an executable link with the
   4202  1.1     skrll 		           symbol binding locally.  Mark it as belonging
   4203  1.1     skrll 		           to module 1, the executable.  */
   4204  1.1     skrll 		        bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 1,
   4205  1.1     skrll 				    htab->sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4206  1.1     skrll 		        bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
   4207  1.1     skrll 				    htab->sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   4208  1.1     skrll 		      }
   4209  1.1     skrll 
   4210  1.1     skrll 
   4211  1.1     skrll 		    cur_off += 8;
   4212  1.1     skrll 		  }
   4213  1.1     skrll 
   4214  1.1     skrll 		if (tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE)
   4215  1.1     skrll 		  {
   4216  1.1     skrll 		    if (need_relocs)
   4217  1.1     skrll 		      {
   4218  1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_offset = (cur_off
   4219  1.1     skrll 					   + htab->sgot->output_section->vma
   4220  1.1     skrll 					   + htab->sgot->output_offset);
   4221  1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32);
   4222  1.1     skrll 
   4223  1.1     skrll 			if (indx == 0)
   4224  1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   4225  1.1     skrll 			else
   4226  1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4227  1.1     skrll 
   4228  1.1     skrll 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4229  1.1     skrll 			htab->srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4230  1.1     skrll 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4231  1.1     skrll 		      }
   4232  1.1     skrll 		    else
   4233  1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, tpoff (info, relocation),
   4234  1.1     skrll 				  htab->sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4235  1.1     skrll 
   4236  1.1     skrll 		    cur_off += 4;
   4237  1.1     skrll 		  }
   4238  1.1     skrll 
   4239  1.1     skrll 		if (hh != NULL)
   4240  1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.got.offset |= 1;
   4241  1.1     skrll 		else
   4242  1.1     skrll 		  local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   4243  1.1     skrll 	      }
   4244  1.1     skrll 
   4245  1.1     skrll 	    if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD)
   4246  1.1     skrll 	  	&& r_type != R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L
   4247  1.1     skrll 	  	&& r_type != R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R)
   4248  1.1     skrll 	      off += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4249  1.1     skrll 
   4250  1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   4251  1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   4252  1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_offset
   4253  1.1     skrll 			  + htab->sgot->output_section->vma);
   4254  1.1     skrll 
   4255  1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4256  1.1     skrll 	  }
   4257  1.1     skrll 
   4258  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
   4259  1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
   4260  1.1     skrll 	  {
   4261  1.1     skrll 	    relocation = tpoff (info, relocation);
   4262  1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4263  1.1     skrll 	  }
   4264  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4265  1.1     skrll 
   4266  1.1     skrll 	default:
   4267  1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4268  1.1     skrll 	}
   4269  1.1     skrll 
   4270  1.1     skrll       rstatus = final_link_relocate (input_section, contents, rela, relocation,
   4271  1.1     skrll 			       htab, sym_sec, hh, info);
   4272  1.1     skrll 
   4273  1.1     skrll       if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_ok)
   4274  1.1     skrll 	continue;
   4275  1.1     skrll 
   4276  1.1     skrll       if (hh != NULL)
   4277  1.1     skrll 	sym_name = hh_name (hh);
   4278  1.1     skrll       else
   4279  1.1     skrll 	{
   4280  1.1     skrll 	  sym_name = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   4281  1.1     skrll 						      symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   4282  1.1     skrll 						      sym->st_name);
   4283  1.1     skrll 	  if (sym_name == NULL)
   4284  1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   4285  1.1     skrll 	  if (*sym_name == '\0')
   4286  1.1     skrll 	    sym_name = bfd_section_name (input_bfd, sym_sec);
   4287  1.1     skrll 	}
   4288  1.1     skrll 
   4289  1.1     skrll       howto = elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type;
   4290  1.1     skrll 
   4291  1.1     skrll       if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_undefined || rstatus == bfd_reloc_notsupported)
   4292  1.1     skrll 	{
   4293  1.1     skrll 	  if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_notsupported || !warned_undef)
   4294  1.1     skrll 	    {
   4295  1.1     skrll 	      (*_bfd_error_handler)
   4296  1.1     skrll 		(_("%B(%A+0x%lx): cannot handle %s for %s"),
   4297  1.1     skrll 		 input_bfd,
   4298  1.1     skrll 		 input_section,
   4299  1.1     skrll 		 (long) rela->r_offset,
   4300  1.1     skrll 		 howto->name,
   4301  1.1     skrll 		 sym_name);
   4302  1.1     skrll 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   4303  1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   4304  1.1     skrll 	    }
   4305  1.1     skrll 	}
   4306  1.1     skrll       else
   4307  1.1     skrll 	{
   4308  1.1     skrll 	  if (!((*info->callbacks->reloc_overflow)
   4309  1.1     skrll 		(info, (hh ? &hh->eh.root : NULL), sym_name, howto->name,
   4310  1.1     skrll 		 (bfd_vma) 0, input_bfd, input_section, rela->r_offset)))
   4311  1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   4312  1.1     skrll 	}
   4313  1.1     skrll     }
   4314  1.1     skrll 
   4315  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4316  1.1     skrll }
   4317  1.1     skrll 
   4318  1.1     skrll /* Finish up dynamic symbol handling.  We set the contents of various
   4319  1.1     skrll    dynamic sections here.  */
   4320  1.1     skrll 
   4321  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   4322  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   4323  1.1     skrll 				  struct bfd_link_info *info,
   4324  1.1     skrll 				  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   4325  1.1     skrll 				  Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   4326  1.1     skrll {
   4327  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   4328  1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   4329  1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *loc;
   4330  1.1     skrll 
   4331  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   4332  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   4333  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   4334  1.1     skrll 
   4335  1.1     skrll   if (eh->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   4336  1.1     skrll     {
   4337  1.1     skrll       bfd_vma value;
   4338  1.1     skrll 
   4339  1.1     skrll       if (eh->plt.offset & 1)
   4340  1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4341  1.1     skrll 
   4342  1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the procedure linkage table.  Set
   4343  1.1     skrll 	 it up.
   4344  1.1     skrll 
   4345  1.1     skrll 	 The format of a plt entry is
   4346  1.1     skrll 	 <funcaddr>
   4347  1.1     skrll 	 <__gp>
   4348  1.1     skrll       */
   4349  1.1     skrll       value = 0;
   4350  1.1     skrll       if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4351  1.1     skrll 	  || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   4352  1.1     skrll 	{
   4353  1.1     skrll 	  value = eh->root.u.def.value;
   4354  1.1     skrll 	  if (eh->root.u.def.section->output_section != NULL)
   4355  1.1     skrll 	    value += (eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4356  1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4357  1.1     skrll 	}
   4358  1.1     skrll 
   4359  1.1     skrll       /* Create a dynamic IPLT relocation for this entry.  */
   4360  1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (eh->plt.offset
   4361  1.1     skrll 		      + htab->splt->output_offset
   4362  1.1     skrll 		      + htab->splt->output_section->vma);
   4363  1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   4364  1.1     skrll 	{
   4365  1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   4366  1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   4367  1.1     skrll 	}
   4368  1.1     skrll       else
   4369  1.1     skrll 	{
   4370  1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol has been marked to become local, and is
   4371  1.1     skrll 	     used by a plabel so must be kept in the .plt.  */
   4372  1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   4373  1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = value;
   4374  1.1     skrll 	}
   4375  1.1     skrll 
   4376  1.1     skrll       loc = htab->srelplt->contents;
   4377  1.1     skrll       loc += htab->srelplt->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4378  1.1     skrll       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (htab->splt->output_section->owner, &rela, loc);
   4379  1.1     skrll 
   4380  1.1     skrll       if (!eh->def_regular)
   4381  1.1     skrll 	{
   4382  1.1     skrll 	  /* Mark the symbol as undefined, rather than as defined in
   4383  1.1     skrll 	     the .plt section.  Leave the value alone.  */
   4384  1.1     skrll 	  sym->st_shndx = SHN_UNDEF;
   4385  1.1     skrll 	}
   4386  1.1     skrll     }
   4387  1.1     skrll 
   4388  1.1     skrll   if (eh->got.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   4389  1.1     skrll       && (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) == 0
   4390  1.1     skrll       && (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE) == 0)
   4391  1.1     skrll     {
   4392  1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the global offset table.  Set it
   4393  1.1     skrll 	 up.  */
   4394  1.1     skrll 
   4395  1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = ((eh->got.offset &~ (bfd_vma) 1)
   4396  1.1     skrll 		      + htab->sgot->output_offset
   4397  1.1     skrll 		      + htab->sgot->output_section->vma);
   4398  1.1     skrll 
   4399  1.1     skrll       /* If this is a -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   4400  1.1     skrll 	 locally or was forced to be local because of a version file,
   4401  1.1     skrll 	 we just want to emit a RELATIVE reloc.  The entry in the
   4402  1.1     skrll 	 global offset table will already have been initialized in the
   4403  1.1     skrll 	 relocate_section function.  */
   4404  1.1     skrll       if (info->shared
   4405  1.1     skrll 	  && (info->symbolic || eh->dynindx == -1)
   4406  1.1     skrll 	  && eh->def_regular)
   4407  1.1     skrll 	{
   4408  1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   4409  1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = (eh->root.u.def.value
   4410  1.1     skrll 			  + eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4411  1.1     skrll 			  + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4412  1.1     skrll 	}
   4413  1.1     skrll       else
   4414  1.1     skrll 	{
   4415  1.1     skrll 	  if ((eh->got.offset & 1) != 0)
   4416  1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   4417  1.1     skrll 
   4418  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0, htab->sgot->contents + (eh->got.offset & ~1));
   4419  1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   4420  1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   4421  1.1     skrll 	}
   4422  1.1     skrll 
   4423  1.1     skrll       loc = htab->srelgot->contents;
   4424  1.1     skrll       loc += htab->srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4425  1.1     skrll       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   4426  1.1     skrll     }
   4427  1.1     skrll 
   4428  1.1     skrll   if (eh->needs_copy)
   4429  1.1     skrll     {
   4430  1.1     skrll       asection *sec;
   4431  1.1     skrll 
   4432  1.1     skrll       /* This symbol needs a copy reloc.  Set it up.  */
   4433  1.1     skrll 
   4434  1.1     skrll       if (! (eh->dynindx != -1
   4435  1.1     skrll 	     && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4436  1.1     skrll 		 || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)))
   4437  1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4438  1.1     skrll 
   4439  1.1     skrll       sec = htab->srelbss;
   4440  1.1     skrll 
   4441  1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (eh->root.u.def.value
   4442  1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4443  1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4444  1.1     skrll       rela.r_addend = 0;
   4445  1.1     skrll       rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_COPY);
   4446  1.1     skrll       loc = sec->contents + sec->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4447  1.1     skrll       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   4448  1.1     skrll     }
   4449  1.1     skrll 
   4450  1.1     skrll   /* Mark _DYNAMIC and _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ as absolute.  */
   4451  1.1     skrll   if (eh_name (eh)[0] == '_'
   4452  1.1     skrll       && (strcmp (eh_name (eh), "_DYNAMIC") == 0
   4453  1.1     skrll 	  || eh == htab->etab.hgot))
   4454  1.1     skrll     {
   4455  1.1     skrll       sym->st_shndx = SHN_ABS;
   4456  1.1     skrll     }
   4457  1.1     skrll 
   4458  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4459  1.1     skrll }
   4460  1.1     skrll 
   4461  1.1     skrll /* Used to decide how to sort relocs in an optimal manner for the
   4462  1.1     skrll    dynamic linker, before writing them out.  */
   4463  1.1     skrll 
   4464  1.1     skrll static enum elf_reloc_type_class
   4465  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_reloc_type_class (const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
   4466  1.1     skrll {
   4467  1.1     skrll   /* Handle TLS relocs first; we don't want them to be marked
   4468  1.3  christos      relative by the "if (ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) == STN_UNDEF)"
   4469  1.1     skrll      check below.  */
   4470  1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   4471  1.1     skrll     {
   4472  1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32:
   4473  1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32:
   4474  1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32:
   4475  1.1     skrll         return reloc_class_normal;
   4476  1.1     skrll     }
   4477  1.1     skrll 
   4478  1.3  christos   if (ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) == STN_UNDEF)
   4479  1.1     skrll     return reloc_class_relative;
   4480  1.1     skrll 
   4481  1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   4482  1.1     skrll     {
   4483  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_IPLT:
   4484  1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_plt;
   4485  1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_COPY:
   4486  1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_copy;
   4487  1.1     skrll     default:
   4488  1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_normal;
   4489  1.1     skrll     }
   4490  1.1     skrll }
   4491  1.1     skrll 
   4492  1.1     skrll /* Finish up the dynamic sections.  */
   4493  1.1     skrll 
   4494  1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   4495  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd,
   4496  1.1     skrll 				    struct bfd_link_info *info)
   4497  1.1     skrll {
   4498  1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   4499  1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   4500  1.1     skrll   asection *sdyn;
   4501  1.1     skrll 
   4502  1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   4503  1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   4504  1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   4505  1.3  christos 
   4506  1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->etab.dynobj;
   4507  1.1     skrll 
   4508  1.1     skrll   sdyn = bfd_get_section_by_name (dynobj, ".dynamic");
   4509  1.1     skrll 
   4510  1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   4511  1.1     skrll     {
   4512  1.1     skrll       Elf32_External_Dyn *dyncon, *dynconend;
   4513  1.1     skrll 
   4514  1.1     skrll       if (sdyn == NULL)
   4515  1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4516  1.1     skrll 
   4517  1.1     skrll       dyncon = (Elf32_External_Dyn *) sdyn->contents;
   4518  1.1     skrll       dynconend = (Elf32_External_Dyn *) (sdyn->contents + sdyn->size);
   4519  1.1     skrll       for (; dyncon < dynconend; dyncon++)
   4520  1.1     skrll 	{
   4521  1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Dyn dyn;
   4522  1.1     skrll 	  asection *s;
   4523  1.1     skrll 
   4524  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf32_swap_dyn_in (dynobj, dyncon, &dyn);
   4525  1.1     skrll 
   4526  1.1     skrll 	  switch (dyn.d_tag)
   4527  1.1     skrll 	    {
   4528  1.1     skrll 	    default:
   4529  1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   4530  1.1     skrll 
   4531  1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTGOT:
   4532  1.1     skrll 	      /* Use PLTGOT to set the GOT register.  */
   4533  1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = elf_gp (output_bfd);
   4534  1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4535  1.1     skrll 
   4536  1.1     skrll 	    case DT_JMPREL:
   4537  1.1     skrll 	      s = htab->srelplt;
   4538  1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
   4539  1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4540  1.1     skrll 
   4541  1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTRELSZ:
   4542  1.1     skrll 	      s = htab->srelplt;
   4543  1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_val = s->size;
   4544  1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4545  1.1     skrll 
   4546  1.1     skrll 	    case DT_RELASZ:
   4547  1.1     skrll 	      /* Don't count procedure linkage table relocs in the
   4548  1.1     skrll 		 overall reloc count.  */
   4549  1.1     skrll 	      s = htab->srelplt;
   4550  1.1     skrll 	      if (s == NULL)
   4551  1.1     skrll 		continue;
   4552  1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_val -= s->size;
   4553  1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4554  1.1     skrll 
   4555  1.1     skrll 	    case DT_RELA:
   4556  1.1     skrll 	      /* We may not be using the standard ELF linker script.
   4557  1.1     skrll 		 If .rela.plt is the first .rela section, we adjust
   4558  1.1     skrll 		 DT_RELA to not include it.  */
   4559  1.1     skrll 	      s = htab->srelplt;
   4560  1.1     skrll 	      if (s == NULL)
   4561  1.1     skrll 		continue;
   4562  1.1     skrll 	      if (dyn.d_un.d_ptr != s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset)
   4563  1.1     skrll 		continue;
   4564  1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr += s->size;
   4565  1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4566  1.1     skrll 	    }
   4567  1.1     skrll 
   4568  1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf32_swap_dyn_out (output_bfd, &dyn, dyncon);
   4569  1.1     skrll 	}
   4570  1.1     skrll     }
   4571  1.1     skrll 
   4572  1.1     skrll   if (htab->sgot != NULL && htab->sgot->size != 0)
   4573  1.1     skrll     {
   4574  1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the first entry in the global offset table.
   4575  1.1     skrll 	 We use it to point to our dynamic section, if we have one.  */
   4576  1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   4577  1.1     skrll 		  sdyn ? sdyn->output_section->vma + sdyn->output_offset : 0,
   4578  1.1     skrll 		  htab->sgot->contents);
   4579  1.1     skrll 
   4580  1.1     skrll       /* The second entry is reserved for use by the dynamic linker.  */
   4581  1.1     skrll       memset (htab->sgot->contents + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE, 0, GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   4582  1.1     skrll 
   4583  1.1     skrll       /* Set .got entry size.  */
   4584  1.1     skrll       elf_section_data (htab->sgot->output_section)
   4585  1.1     skrll 	->this_hdr.sh_entsize = GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4586  1.1     skrll     }
   4587  1.1     skrll 
   4588  1.1     skrll   if (htab->splt != NULL && htab->splt->size != 0)
   4589  1.1     skrll     {
   4590  1.1     skrll       /* Set plt entry size.  */
   4591  1.1     skrll       elf_section_data (htab->splt->output_section)
   4592  1.1     skrll 	->this_hdr.sh_entsize = PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4593  1.1     skrll 
   4594  1.1     skrll       if (htab->need_plt_stub)
   4595  1.1     skrll 	{
   4596  1.1     skrll 	  /* Set up the .plt stub.  */
   4597  1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (htab->splt->contents
   4598  1.1     skrll 		  + htab->splt->size - sizeof (plt_stub),
   4599  1.1     skrll 		  plt_stub, sizeof (plt_stub));
   4600  1.1     skrll 
   4601  1.1     skrll 	  if ((htab->splt->output_offset
   4602  1.1     skrll 	       + htab->splt->output_section->vma
   4603  1.1     skrll 	       + htab->splt->size)
   4604  1.1     skrll 	      != (htab->sgot->output_offset
   4605  1.1     skrll 		  + htab->sgot->output_section->vma))
   4606  1.1     skrll 	    {
   4607  1.1     skrll 	      (*_bfd_error_handler)
   4608  1.1     skrll 		(_(".got section not immediately after .plt section"));
   4609  1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   4610  1.1     skrll 	    }
   4611  1.1     skrll 	}
   4612  1.1     skrll     }
   4613  1.1     skrll 
   4614  1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4615  1.1     skrll }
   4616  1.1     skrll 
   4617  1.1     skrll /* Called when writing out an object file to decide the type of a
   4618  1.1     skrll    symbol.  */
   4619  1.1     skrll static int
   4620  1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_elf_get_symbol_type (Elf_Internal_Sym *elf_sym, int type)
   4621  1.1     skrll {
   4622  1.1     skrll   if (ELF_ST_TYPE (elf_sym->st_info) == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   4623  1.1     skrll     return STT_PARISC_MILLI;
   4624  1.1     skrll   else
   4625  1.1     skrll     return type;
   4626  1.1     skrll }
   4627  1.1     skrll 
   4628  1.1     skrll /* Misc BFD support code.  */
   4629  1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_is_local_label_name    elf_hppa_is_local_label_name
   4630  1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_reloc_type_lookup	     elf_hppa_reloc_type_lookup
   4631  1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_reloc_name_lookup      elf_hppa_reloc_name_lookup
   4632  1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto		     elf_hppa_info_to_howto
   4633  1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto_rel		     elf_hppa_info_to_howto_rel
   4634  1.1     skrll 
   4635  1.1     skrll /* Stuff for the BFD linker.  */
   4636  1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_final_link	     elf32_hppa_final_link
   4637  1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_link_hash_table_create elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_create
   4638  1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_link_hash_table_free   elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_free
   4639  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_adjust_dynamic_symbol    elf32_hppa_adjust_dynamic_symbol
   4640  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_copy_indirect_symbol     elf32_hppa_copy_indirect_symbol
   4641  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_check_relocs	     elf32_hppa_check_relocs
   4642  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_create_dynamic_sections  elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections
   4643  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_fake_sections	     elf_hppa_fake_sections
   4644  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_relocate_section	     elf32_hppa_relocate_section
   4645  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_hide_symbol		     elf32_hppa_hide_symbol
   4646  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_symbol    elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_symbol
   4647  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_sections  elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections
   4648  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_size_dynamic_sections    elf32_hppa_size_dynamic_sections
   4649  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_init_index_section	     _bfd_elf_init_1_index_section
   4650  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_mark_hook	     elf32_hppa_gc_mark_hook
   4651  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_sweep_hook	     elf32_hppa_gc_sweep_hook
   4652  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_prstatus	     elf32_hppa_grok_prstatus
   4653  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_psinfo		     elf32_hppa_grok_psinfo
   4654  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_object_p		     elf32_hppa_object_p
   4655  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_final_write_processing   elf_hppa_final_write_processing
   4656  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_post_process_headers     _bfd_elf_set_osabi
   4657  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_get_symbol_type	     elf32_hppa_elf_get_symbol_type
   4658  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_reloc_type_class	     elf32_hppa_reloc_type_class
   4659  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_action_discarded	     elf_hppa_action_discarded
   4660  1.1     skrll 
   4661  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_gc_sections	     1
   4662  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_refcount	     1
   4663  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_alignment	     2
   4664  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_got_plt	     0
   4665  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_readonly	     0
   4666  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_plt_sym	     0
   4667  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_got_header_size	     8
   4668  1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_rela_normal		     1
   4669  1.1     skrll 
   4670  1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		bfd_elf32_hppa_vec
   4671  1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa"
   4672  1.1     skrll #define ELF_ARCH		bfd_arch_hppa
   4673  1.3  christos #define ELF_TARGET_ID		HPPA32_ELF_DATA
   4674  1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_CODE	EM_PARISC
   4675  1.1     skrll #define ELF_MAXPAGESIZE		0x1000
   4676  1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_HPUX
   4677  1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_hpux_bed
   4678  1.1     skrll 
   4679  1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4680  1.1     skrll 
   4681  1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_SYM
   4682  1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		bfd_elf32_hppa_linux_vec
   4683  1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_NAME
   4684  1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa-linux"
   4685  1.1     skrll #undef ELF_OSABI
   4686  1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_LINUX
   4687  1.1     skrll #undef elf32_bed
   4688  1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_linux_bed
   4689  1.1     skrll 
   4690  1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4691  1.1     skrll 
   4692  1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_SYM
   4693  1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		bfd_elf32_hppa_nbsd_vec
   4694  1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_NAME
   4695  1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa-netbsd"
   4696  1.1     skrll #undef ELF_OSABI
   4697  1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_NETBSD
   4698  1.1     skrll #undef elf32_bed
   4699  1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_netbsd_bed
   4700  1.1     skrll 
   4701  1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4702